OASYS SOFTWARE PTY. LTD.

AutoSYS 2000
USERS GUIDE

August 1999

Copyright 1989-1999 OASYS Software Pty. Ltd.

All Rights Reserved No part of the documentation may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording or otherwise, without the prior consent of Oasys Software Pty. Ltd.. Oasys Software Pty. Ltd. PROVIDES THIS PRODUCT ON AN AS IS BASIS. THE LICENSEE AGREES THAT NEITHER Oasys Software Pty. Ltd., NOR ANY OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, SHAREHOLDERS, EMPLOYEES OR OTHER RELATED PARTIES WILL BE LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE TO ANY USER OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR object WITH RESPECT TO ANY LIABILITY, LOSS OR DAMAGE CAUSED OR ALLEGED TO BE CAUSED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY BY USE OF THIS PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR ANTICIPATORY PROFITS, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR OPERATION OF THIS PRODUCT. Oasys Software Pty. Ltd. MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS WHATSOEVER, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THIS PRODUCT, ITS MERCHANTABILITY AND/OR ITS FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. BY USING THIS PRODUCT, IT IS AGREED INTER-PARTIES THAT Oasys Software Pty. Ltd. NOR ITS RELATED objects SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, EVEN IF Oasys Software Pty. Ltd. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Should any part of this agreement be held invalid, the remainder of the agreement shall not be made void/voidable or be held invalid, but SHALL remain in effect. Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Oasys Software Pty. Ltd.. Trademarks Autodesk, the Autodesk logo, AutoCAD and AutoLISP are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. All other product names or trademarks are property of their respective owners. License Agreement The software described in this manual is supplied under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that agreement.

AutoSYS 2000 has been written and developed by Mike Jarvis, Colin Tyack, and Andrew Beard. The AutoSYS 2000 Users Guide has been written by Colin Tyack and Mike Jarvis.

Product Development Manual

Blank Page

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 1 How to Use This Reference 2 AS1100 Standards 2 Typographical Conventions 3 CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING AutoSYS 7 Before Installing AutoSYS 8 Installing AutoSYS 8 Starting AutoSYS 11 AutoSYS version 7.5 Authorisation 11 AutoSYS 2000 Authorisation 16 Obtaining a licence key 18 Initial Drawing Set-up 19 CHAPTER 2 THE AUTOSYS INTERFACE AutoSYS Toolbars 26 Modified Toolbars 26 New Toolbars 26 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Starting AutoSYS 32 Creating a New Drawing 32 Client or Project Based Set-up 35 Command System 36 Pointing Devices 36 Windows Menus 36 Tablet Menus 36 Other Menus 37 Default Responses 37 31 25

ii

Table of Contents

Drawing Sheets 38 Visibility 38 Viewing the Extents 38 Opening Drawings 40 Saving Drawings 41 Ending AutoSYS 41 CHAPTER 4 DRAWING AND PRECISION Drawing Rules 44 Adding Lines 44 Drawing a Rectangle 44 Parallel Line 45 Drawing Circles 45 Drawing With Precision 46 Specify Distance at an Angle 46 Determining Angles 46 Object Snap Overrides 46 Drawing Information 47 Time Spent in Drawing 47 CHAPTER 5 DISPLAY CONTROL Displaying the Full Sheet 50 Zoom In - Aspect Ratio 50 Displaying Visual Elements 52 Ortho 52 Blips 52 Highlight 52 Grips 53 Rotate Cross Hairs 53 Reset Cross Hairs to Zero 53 Displaying Points 53 CHAPTER 6 EDITING METHODS Controlling Object Selection 56 Selection Sets 56 Window Selection 56 Breaking Lines 56 49 43

55

Table of Contents

iii

Between Two Lines 56 Break and Change Layer 57 Copying Objects 58 Copying and Rotating Objects 58 Offsetting 58 Move Objects 60 Move and Rotate 60 Swapping Positions 61 Extending and Trimming Multiple Lines 61 Filleting Objects 62 CHAPTER 7 USING LAYERS 65 Layer Selection 66 Layer Structure 67 Creating Basic Layers 68 Creating Enhanced Layers 68 Setting a Layer Current 72 Layer Visibility 73 Turning Layers Off 74 Turning All Layers On 74 Layer Visibility Dialog Box 75 Controlling Layers in Floating Viewports 77 Changing an Objects Layer 78 CHAPTER 8 USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS Working with Blocks 80 Creating Blocks 80 Defining a Block 81 Defining a Wblock 83 Explode a Block 86 Remaking Blocks 87 Nested Blocks 89 Working with Attributes 92 Define Attribute Definitions 92 Edit Attribute Definitions 92 Editing Attribute Data 92 Editing Attribute Data Properties 93 Refreshing Redefined Attribute Data 93 79

iv

Table of Contents

Attribute Dialog Control 93 External Reference Drawings 94 CHAPTER 9 TEXT 95 Working With Text 96 Creating Text 97 Editing Line Text 100 CHAPTER 10 DIMENSIONS 103 Dimensioning in Paper Space 105 Dimensioning Settings 105 Dimension Text Style 105 Dimension Layer 106 Dimension Styles 106 Working With Dimensions 108 Dimension Format 109 Dimension Precision 110 Limits and Tolerances 110 Updating existing dimensions 111 Prefixes and Suffixes 112 Dimension variable toggles 113 Additional Dimensioning Commands 113 Centre lining Hole groups 113 Circumferential Dimensions 114 CHAPTER 11 DRAWING LAYOUT Working with Drawing Sheets 116 Paper Size 116 Scale 116 Drawing Format 116 Client Code 117 Drawing Sheet Visibility 117 Rescaling a Drawing 118 Adding a Title Block 119 Working in Model Space 121 Working in Paper Space 122 Method 1 - True Paper/Model 122 Method 2 - Paper/Model - 123 115

Table of Contents

Several viewports looking at the one model 123 Method 3 - Paper/Model - 124 Viewports display a unique model space area 124 Working with Scaled Areas 125 Creating Floating Viewports 129 Creating a Viewport from a Scaled Area 130 Creating an Orthographic Viewport Set 130 Zoom All Floating Viewports 131 Controlling Scale in a Floating Viewport 132 Aligning Objects in Floating Viewports 133 Adding Revisions 136 Revision Symbols 136 Revision Table 137 Drawing Annotations 139 Detail Reference and Balloon 139 Section Label 140 Section Arrows 141 Mark Number Label 142 CHAPTER 12 PLOTTING YOUR DRAWING Plotting Your Drawing 144 Steps to Setup AutoSYS Plotting 144 Plot Configuration Parameters File 144 Sheet Size 146 AutoSYS Plot Setup 147 Plotting the Drawing Sheet 149 Trouble Shooting 151 CHAPTER 13 BATCH PROCESSORS Batch Operations 154 Batch Plotting 154 Creating Symbol Libraries 158 User Defined Processors 162 Script File Format 163 Example Script 163 153 143

CHAPTER 14 COMMAND REFERENCE DPQ_12DIM13 173

171

vi

Table of Contents

DPQ_12DIM13STY 173 DPQ_AMENDMK 173 DPQ_ARCDIST 174 DPQ_ASCIIDRAWING 175 DPQ_ATTUPD 175 DPQ_BATCH 177 DPQ_BLOCK 182 DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE 185 DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE 185 DPQ_BLOCKUPDATE 189 DPQ_BREAKATLINE 190 DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN 191 DPQ_BREAKCHANGE 191 DPQ_BREAKEND 192 DPQ_BREAKEQUAL 192 DPQ_BREAKINT 192 DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE 193 DPQ_CHANGELAYER 195 DPQ_CIRCLEIMP 195 DPQ_CLEARSYS 196 DPQ_CLIENT 196 DPQ_CLOUD 199 DPQ_COPYROTATE 200 DPQ_CURVELEADER 200 DPQ_DDATTE 203 DPQ_DDEDIT 203 DPQ_DDMODIFY 203 DPQ_DETAIL 204 DPQ_DETAILSCALE 204 DPQ_DIMCENT 205 DPQ_DIMCIRCUM 205

Table of Contents

vii

DPQ_DIMDIALOG 206 DPQ_DIMOBJECT 207 DPQ_DIMLEADER 207 DPQ_DIMLINE 207 DPQ_DIMREBUILD 208 DPQ_DIMRESET 208 DPQ_DIMSCALERESET 208 DPQ_DIMSCALESET 209 DPQ_DIMTOCURRENTSTYLE 209 DPQ_DIMTOGGLE 209 DPQ_DIMUPDATE 210 DPQ_DISPCFG 210 DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT 211 DPQ_DRAWBREAK 211 DPQ_DZOOM 212 DPQ_EDITOR 213 DPQ_EXTEND 214 DPQ_FBI 215 DPQ_FBINEXT 215 DPQ_FILLET2LINES 215 DPQ_GETANGLE 217 DPQ_GETVPSCALE 217 DPQ_IP 219 DPQ_IPMARK 219 DPQ_ITEM 219 DPQ_ITEMRESET 223 DPQ_JOINLINE 225 DPQ_JUMPLINE DPQ_LAYER 227 DPQ_LAYCONVERT 228 DPQ_LAYEREXTENDED 229
vii

225

viii

Table of Contents

DPQ_LAYERMAKE 230 DPQ_LAYERMODE 230 DPQ_LAYEROFF 232 DPQ_LAYERON 233 DPQ_LAYERSET 233 DPQ_LIBMANAGER 233 DPQ_LIBRARY 237 DPQ_LINESTOPOINT 238 DPQ_LISTING 239 DPQ_LRS 240 DPQ_MAINSHEET 243 DPQ_MEASURE 243 DPQ_MIDLINE 243 DPQ_MLIST 244 DPQ_MOVEROTATE 247 DPQ_MSVPCREATE 247 DPQ_MSVPGETDATA 249 DPQ_MSVPRESCALE 249 DPQ_MTEXT 249 DPQ_MVIEW 250 DPQ_OFFSET/2 251 DPQ_OFFSETIMP/2 251 DPQ_OFFSETIMPERIAL 252 DPQ_ORTHOVPORT 252 DPQ_PARALLEL 253 DPQ_PARTBREAKLINE 253 DPQ_PITEM 254 DPQ_PLOT 258 DPQ_PREFDEFAULT 262 DPQ_PREFDIM 263 DPQ_PREFDRAWING 263

Table of Contents

ix

DPQ_PREFERENCES 263 DPQ_PREFLAYER 263 DPQ_PREFSYSTEM 264 DPQ_PREFTEXT 264 DPQ_PSPACEONLY 264 DPQ_PURGEDPQ 264 DPQ_RECOM 267 DPQ_RECTANGLE 267 DPQ_REINITP 267 DPQ_REINITS 268 DPQ_RESCALE 269 DPQ_REVISION 271 DPQ_RLIST 273 DPQ_ROTATE 273 DPQ_SECTION 277 DPQ_SECTIONBLOCK 277 DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT 278 DPQ_SHEETON 278 DPQ_SHEETOFF 279 DPQ_SLOT 279 DPQ_SNAP0 279 DPQ_SNAPSET 280 DPQ_STATUS 280 DPQ_SWAP 281 DPQ_TERMINAL 283 DPQ_TEXT 283 DPQ_TEXTBOX 284 DPQ_TIME 284 DPQ_TOFF 285 DPQ_TON 285 DPQ_TRIM 285
ix

Table of Contents

DPQ_TXTBRK 286 DPQ_TXTCONT 286 DPQ_TXTINSERT 287 DPQ_TXTLOWER 287 DPQ_TXTRPL 288 DPQ_TXTSCALE 288 DPQ_TXTSRPL 289 DPQ_TXTUPPER 289 DPQ_VIEWSET 291 DPQ_VPALIGN 291 DPQ_WBLOCKALL 293 DPQ_WRITEBLOCK 293 DPQ_ZOOMALL 295 DPQ_ZOOMXP 295 CHAPTER 15 AUTOSYS PREFERENCES AutoSYS System Environment 302 AutoSYS File Categories 302 AutoSYS Preferences 303 Making Modifications to Preferences 305 Common Dialog Boxes 305 CHAPTER 16 SYSTEM PREFERENCES System Preferences 310 System Settings 310 [System] 311 User Interface 315 [Userhandles] 316 Default Settings 317 Redefined Commands 317 [Redefined] 317 Drawing Units 318 301

309

CHAPTER 17 CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES The AutoSYS Client Profile System 320

319

Table of Contents

xi

Client Definition Files 321 The Super User File 322 Editing the List of Clients 322 Editing Definition Files 324 Layer Definition File 326 [LayerSystem] 326 [Dimension] 327 [LayerOrder] 328 [Defaultlayer] 329 [MainLayer] 330 [SecondaryLayer] 331 [PenSize] 331 [LayerFunction] 331 [Layermaplist] 332 [ModelText] 333 [PaperText] 335 [Objectlayer] 335 Text Definition File 337 [TextSystem] 337 [Alternate Fonts] 338 [Textheight] 338 [ModelSpace] 338 [PaperSpace] 338 [Dynamic] 339 Client System Definition File 340 [System] 340 [Scaled Drawing Aids] 340 [Fixed Drawing Aids] 341 [Scale] 341 [Sections] 341 [Object Parameters] 343 Dimension Styles Definition File 344 [Dimstylenames] 344 [DPQ_xxxxxxx] 345 Drawing Sheet Definition File 346 Drawing Sheet Settings 347 The Quick Client Utility 353 What Quick Client Does Not Do 356
xi

xii

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 18 PLOTTER PREFERENCES The AutoSYS Plotting System 360 AutoSYS Plotting Definition Files 360 Pen Parameter File 361 Definition File Search Order 362 Editing Plotter Preferences 362 Plotter System Settings 362 Plotter System Setting Parameters 363 [Plotter] 363 Plotter Batch File Editor 363 Output 364 Steps to setting up AutoSYS plotting 365 AutoSYS Plot Configuration 366 Sheet Size 367

359

CHAPTER 19 TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS AutoSYS Default Drawing Sheets 370 Outline Sheet & Title Files Described 370 File Search Order 371 SSTDA1.DWG 372 STDTLA1.DWG 373 SSTDTHA1.DWG 374 SSTDTMA1.DWG 374 SSTDTRA1.DWG 374 SSTDTBA1.DWG 374 SSTDTPA1.DWG 374 Creating Sheet Outline Sets 375 Determine Plotter Limits 375 Preparation 375 Draw the sheet outline 376 Create the Title Attributes Block 378 Create the Revision History Block 380 Create the Material List Block 381 Create the Material List Header Block 382 Other Blocks Associated with the Title Outline 382 Update the Client Definition File 383

369

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on purchasing AutoSYS 2000. AutoSYS is a quality management and drawing productivity system for companies or contractors who require
n n n

Total quality systems management Drawings to be produced for multiple clients The ability to run one or more third party applications.

The AutoSYS Users Guide describes AutoSYSs features, concepts, and procedures. Concepts and procedures are explained in a step by step manner. This introduction covers
n n

How to use this reference manual Standard conventions used in the documentation

INTRODUCTION

How to Use This Reference

This AutoSYS Users Guide is for Windows versions of AutoSYS 2000. The Users Guide describes the fundamental procedures to get started using AutoSYS. The manual has been organised in such a way that if you started from the beginning and follow the concepts through, you will learn the basic concepts from creating a new drawing through to plotting the drawing. You will need to read this manual in conjunction with the AutoCAD documentation as references are made to AutoCAD commands, which are not fully documented in this manual. The Users Guide will assume default settings for AutoSYS. Customising AutoSYS is described in Part 4 of this manual. Concepts and procedures explained in the Users Guide is done by explaining the concept, then stepping through the procedure. To draw a rectangle 1 Start the DPQ_RECTANGLE command by selecting
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Rectangle, then Enhanced From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Square

2 Select an object. 2000 relates to AutoSYS menus when used in conjunction with AutoCAD 2000 windows platforms. Tablet menu commands are the same for AutoSYS when used on all platforms. The co-ordinates for tablet menu commands are shown in square brackets, [T2-P3].

AS1100 Standards
AutoSYS adheres to the provisions of the Australian Standards for Engineering Drawings AS1100, and other relevant standards, and follows the recommended drawing practices contained in The Australian Engineering Drawing Handbook published by the Institution of Engineers Australia. In situations where it was necessary to select some particular form of practice, and there is no single form laid down as a standard, or where the matter is subject to individual preference, AutoSYS uses a form suggested in the Drawing Handbook referred to above, but allows for alterations by the user to suit any prevailing design office practice.

How to Use This Reference

Typographical Conventions
Throughout AutoSYS documentation, the following type styles are used to distinguish text, computer messages and user input. Text element Prompts, Menu items, and other text displayed on the screen Directions on how to respond to prompts, file names, names of directories, and names of reference material. AutoCAD named objects, and AutoCAD system variable names. Keys pressed on the keyboard Keys pressed simultaneously on the keyboard Text in ASCII text files AutoLISP Example Command: dpq_rectangle From the Draw menu, choose Rectangle Select first line: Select objects: Use an object selection method autoexec.bat c:\dpq_sys\support AutoCAD Users Guide LINE, BLIPMODE, DIMTIX (enter or return)

+c
LOAD=ADS (load "myfunction"))

INTRODUCTION

Blank Page

PART 1

INSTALLATION

Blank Page

1
INSTALLING AutoSYS

AutoSYS can be installed to run either as a stand alone system or in a network environment. In a network environment, each Workstation can have a different set of available clients and a unique location for their block library files, while still accessing the client definition files maintained by the system supervisor. This chapter describes the steps for installing AutoSYS for Windows 95/98 and Windows NT, and how to enter authorisation codes for the modules you have purchased.

Chapter 1

INSTALLING AutoSYS

Before Installing AutoSYS

Before installing AutoSYS, AutoCAD must already be installed, run and configured. Refer to The AutoCAD Installation guide for details on installing that product On windows NT4 platforms you must have guest permissions to install some components. If you don't have guest privileges, see your system administrator. Make sure you have access rights to the following locations for the proper installation and execution of AutoSYS: AutoSYS install folder Windows system folder System registry To run AutoSYS 2000 you will require the following hardware and software.
n n n n

AutoCAD 2000 The Application Loader (Installed with AutoSYS) System requirements as set out for AutoCAD 2000 Mouse or digitiser supported by AutoCAD

Installing AutoSYS
AutoSYS utilises the Sheriff software licencing system, ensuring that AutoSYS is only run on computers for which it is licensed. It is independent of any AutoCAD hardware lock. The first time the program is run (and until the software is authorised) a Dialog box will display, prompting you to Authorise the product or to defer. You are able to defer authorisation for 30 days after which, AutoSYS will not run. Contact your dealer for the Authorisation code (as explained later in this chapter . Once the correct Authorisation code has been entered the program will continue. This is a once only operation. If you wish to upgrade your AutoCAD or move the program to another computer, you must export the licence. The method for doing this is explained later in this chapter. The following instructions explain how to install AutoSYS on your computer or on your network. AutoSYS includes the following Set-up options
n

Stand Alone Install. This will install all program and workstation files including The Application Loader files, either on your computer or into a network drive. If an earlier version of AutoSYS is detected you can

Installing AutoSYS

choose to update the existing installation. Some files will be over written so make a backup first.
n

Network Installation. This allows AutoSYS to be installed on a network server. You can install AutoSYS so that others may later install it from the server, or you can directly run it from the server. Workstation Installation. This option only appears when installing from a network installation. It installs workstation files (including some Application Loader files), on your computer or home directory. The program and client data files are located on the network.

To Install an AutoSYS 2000 1. Insert the AutoSYS 2000 CD in the appropriate drive. 2. If the Autoload function does not start the install automatically, select the Windows Taskbar START button, choose RUN, designate the CD drive, and enter the path name and Set-up. z:\setup 3. The install wizard will now take you through a number of Dialog boxes to install AutoSYS depending on the installation type selected. 4. The next Dialog requires you to enter your Name and Company. This information is extracted from the computer.. The name entered here will be inserted in the DRAWN BY field of the title block in each drawing. A value must be entered here. This ID is also used by network versions to identify users on a network. Your Initials will be OK. This is not done when performing a network installation. Enter your details, and choose next. 5. The next dialog requires you to enter the serial number can CD-Key of you products. This information is on the back of the CD jewel case. Enter this information and hit next. 5. The Set-up wizard will search for an installed version of The Application Loader. If none is found then you will be given the choice to upgrade the existing installation or do a full install. The installer will identify valid AutoCAD installations and allow you to choose which version of AutoCAD you wish to attach AutoSYS to. The installer will attach AutoSYS version 7.5 to AutoCAD 2000 and AutoSYS 2000 to AutoCAD 2000. If you intend to upgrade and existing installation of AutoSYS, remember, AutoSYS 2000 will only operate on AutoCAD 2000 based products. The updated installation will not operate on earlier versions of AutoCAD. Therefore

10

Chapter 1

INSTALLING AutoSYS

if you wish to continue to use R14 and existing AutoSYS you should choose a new install and place it in a different directory. 6. You will now be prompted for an Installation directory where the AutoSYS files will be copied. If the default path shown is incorrect, select the Browse button and choose another drive and directory. If an existing version of AutoSYS is detected the path to this directory will be shown for your information. When you are happy with the installation drive and directory choose next. 7. The next Dialog will display the installation settings you have selected. Choose Back to change any of the settings, or choose Next to begin copying files to your disk. 8. The Application Loader and then AutoSYS files will now be copied to the path indicated in step 6. 9. The installation program will make changes to The Application Loader, Application definition file DPLAPP13.INI. For AutoCAD R13 DPLAPP14.INI for AutoCAD R14 and DPLAPP15.INI for AutoCAD 2000, Adding AutoSYS to the list of applications. As AutoSYS is designed to run with The Application Loader, AutoSYS will be marked to Autoload in The Application Loader Preferences. This step is not performed on a network install. For AutoCAD R14 and 2000, the installation program will create a profile based on the last used profile in AutoCAD. This profile will be stored in a profile format file (.arg) in the installation directory. A windows folder will be created to contain the loading functions as well an Uninstaller. A windows ICON will also be created on the desktop. When the installation is complete, the Set-up program returns you to Windows.

Starting AutoSYS

11

Starting AutoSYS
Unlike earlier versions, AutoSYS does not run directly from a Windows icon or Shortcut. All applications are run from inside AutoCAD using The Application Loader as the loading tool. The Windows ICON actually runs an Application Loader enabled version of AutoCAD Starting AutoSYS for the first time - AutoCAD r13 1. Start AutoCAD by selecting The Application Loader icon in Windows. 2. AutoCAD will start and load The Application Loader. 3. The Application Loader will load AutoSYS as part of the Autoload function. (Refer to The Application Loader Users Guide for details of Autoload) 4. If The Application Loader did not load AutoSYS automatically then run DPQ_EXECUTE or select the DPQ_EXECUTE icon, then choose AutoSYS from the list of applications. (Refer to The Application Loader Users Guide p8 for details of DPQ_EXECUTE)

AutoSYS version 7.5 Authorisation

The Application Loader, AutoSYS and AutoSYS Application Modules are individually authorised. 1. The first time The Application Loader is run, it will need to be authorised and the dialog below will be displayed. The installation program will have copied a registration file DPL.INF into the root of C drive. Just choose OK. If this fails, locate the DPL.INF file and point to it in this dialog, then hit OK.

12

Chapter 1

INSTALLING AutoSYS

2. The first time you run AutoSYS the AutoSYS Authorisation Program Dialog box will appear. Note the AutoCAD Serial Number, and AutoCAD Hardware Lock Number, fill in your registration card and fax it to the number on the card.

Authorise
After you have received your code enter it into the Authorisation Code edit box and select the Authorise button. AutoSYS need only be authorised once, for any serial number hardware lock combination.

Defer
Deferring authorisation will allow AutoSYS to run for up to 30 days. This allows time to enter your Authorisation code. After the 30 day period has expired the only way to get the program running will be to enter the authorisation code and select the Authorise button.

Starting AutoSYS

13

3. In R13, Once Authorisation is completed, you will be presented with the AutoSYS sign on Dialog (shown Below), AutoSYS does not allow operations in unnamed drawings in r13.

4. To begin a drawing session select either NEW or OPEN from the file pull-down or the NEW or OPEN tool from the Standard Toolbar. Starting AutoSYS for the first time - AutoCAD r14 1. Start AutoCAD by selecting The Application Loader icon in Windows. 2. AutoCAD will start and display the r14 Drawing Startup Wizard. As AutoSYS takes the place of the Use A WIZARD and Use a Template buttons, select either the NEW or OPEN EXISTING options

13

14

Chapter 1

INSTALLING AutoSYS

3. AutoCAD will now load The Application Loader. Authorisation is the same as detailed in the R13 installation, described before. 4. The Application Loader will load AutoSYS as part of the Autoload function. (Refer to The Application Loader Users Guide for details of Autoload) 5. If The Application Loader did not load AutoSYS automatically then run DPQ_EXECUTE or select the DPQ_EXECUTE icon, then choose AutoSYS from the list of applications. (Refer to The Application Loader Users Guide p8 for details of DPQ_EXECUTE) 6. The AutoSYS Authorisation dialog as described in the r13 section, will be displayed. Authorisation is the same for r14 as for r13 7. Once Authorisation is completed, the AutoSYS New Drawing dialog will be displayed. If you selected Open EXISTING Drawing and the drawing is an AutoSYS drawing you will be able to edit the drawing at this point. Non AutoSYS drawings are required to be set up, and you will be presented with the AutoSYS New Drawing dialog. Refer to the Part 2 of this manual for details of the how to proceed from here.

Starting AutoSYS

15

Starting AutoSYS for the first time - AutoCAD 2000 1. Start AutoCAD by selecting The Application Loader icon in Windows. 2. AutoCAD will start and display the AutoCAD 2000 Drawing Wizard. As AutoSYS takes the place of the Use A WIZARD and Use a Template buttons, select either the Start from Scratch or Open Existing options

3. AutoCAD will now load The Application Loader. Refer to the next section on how to Authorise the product. 4. The Application Loader will load AutoSYS as part of the Autoload function. (Refer to The Application Loader Users Guide for details of Autoload) 5. If The Application Loader did not load AutoSYS automatically then run DPQ_EXECUTE or select the DPQ_EXECUTE icon, then choose AutoSYS from the list of applications. (Refer to The Application Loader Users Guide p8 for details of DPQ_EXECUTE) 6. On first entry into AutoCAD the AutoSYS Authorisation dialog will be displayed. Refer to the next section on how to Authorise the product.

15

16

Chapter 1

INSTALLING AutoSYS

7. Once Authorisation is completed, the AutoSYS New Drawing dialog will be displayed. If you selected Open EXISTING Drawing and the drawing is an AutoSYS drawing you will be able to edit the drawing at this point. Non AutoSYS drawings are required to be set up, and you will be presented with the AutoSYS New Drawing dialog. Refer to the Part 2 of this manual for details of the how to proceed from here.

AutoSYS 2000 Authorisation

The Application Loader, AutoSYS and AutoSYS Application Modules are individually authorised. The Application Loader and AutoSYS 2000use a machine based system of authorisation by ensuring that they can run only on machines for which they are licensed. In order to run the programs for the first time you must obtain a unique licence key from the publisher. Normally this process takes place when a product is run up for the first time, although it can be done manually using the Sheriff Administrator, which is in your Oasys Software Program Folder A licence key is stored in a licence file on your hardware; because the licence file is bound to the hardware, it is not possible to run the application illegally. To obtain your licence key you must supply Oasys software Pty. Ltd. with a Reference Code. The 24-digit Reference Code incorporates a unique digital fingerprint of the computer on which it was generated and the licence key granted by Oasys software Pty. Ltd. is also unique to that computer. If a protected software product is copied to another computer it will fail to run unless (a) you are issued with a new licence or (b) an existing licence is imported from another computer or (c) the software is being run on a network and there are spare licences available on the server. 1. The first time either The Application Loader or AutoSYS is run, it will need to be registered. You will be presented with the following dialog to register the product with your computer.

Click OK to this dialog. The product will be registered with your computer and be allowed to run for a period of 30 days allowing you time to obtain your licence key.

Starting AutoSYS

17

2. The Authorisation dialog will be displayed. Allowing you to either Authorise the product or defer.

Authorise
In order to obtain a licence key to authorise your product you must first get a machine code. To obtain a machine code hit Authorise. Refer to the next section on Obtaining your licence key Network Users who wish to obtain a licence from a Server MUST hit defer.

Defer
Deferring authorisation will allow AutoSYS to run for up to 30 days. This allows time to enter your licence key. After the 30 day period has expired the only way to get the program running will be to enter the licence key using the Licence administrator program which was installed with the software and located in the Oasys Software Program folder. 3. Once Authorisation is completed, you will be presented with the AutoSYS Drawing setup dialog.

17

18

Chapter 1

INSTALLING AutoSYS

Obtaining a licence key

1. Click Authorise in the Authorisation dialog box shown before. A licencing dialog will be displayed

Starting AutoSYS

19

2. Click on License the product now. A Product Licence dialog box displays your Reference Code. Fill out your registration form with the reference code and Fax it back to Oasys Software Pty. Ltd. Click Cancel to run in defer mode until you receive your licence key.

3. When you are issued with a 40-digit licence key make a note of the licence key number, enter it in the License box and click on OK to enable the licence. The software program will now run normally. Note : Do not select Generate New Licence unless told to do so by your software supplier.

Initial Drawing Set-up

AutoSYS comes complete with a default drawing office Set-up defined under the client name (STD=STANDARD). This client definition contains all that is required to begin drawing straight away. AutoSYS is designed as a client based drawing utility. This means each client or project can have a separate definition for the drawing structure. The drawing structure is a system of Drawing sheets, Material lists, Revisions, Annotation blocks, Layer, Dimension, Text and pen mapping. Each client, project or application Set-up is defined in a set of definition files.
19

20

Chapter 1

INSTALLING AutoSYS

Although a prototype drawing is provided with AutoSYS which defines basic Layer, Text and Dimstyle settings, AutoSYS will run without one. All required Layers Text styles and Dimension styles will be created when required based on the current client definition. The rest of this manual will describe, in detail how to build client definition files and how to customise the system to work the way you want.

Starting AutoSYS

21

Blank Page

21

PART 2

USERS GUIDE

Blank Page

2
THE AUTOSYS INTERFACE

This chapter describes the AutoSYS toolbar layout.

25

26

Chapter 2

THE AUTOSYS INTERFACE

AutoSYS Toolbars
AutoSYS 2000 fully utilises the AutoCAD 2000 toolbar interface. Access to screen side menus has been dropped, and replaced with Dialog box options where required. To make the transition between using standard AutoCAD and AutoSYS easier, we have added AutoSYS functionality to the existing AutoCAD toolbar sets, when these exist. Additional utilities have been included in new toolbars.

Modified Toolbars
The existing main toolbars that have been modified are,
n n n n n

Standard toolbar Object properties toolbar Draw toolbar Modify toolbar Dimension toolbar

New Toolbars
New toolbars that have been added include,
n n n n n n n n n n n n n

AutoSYS Main toolbar. AutoSYS Layers toolbar. Viewport utilities toolbar. Reference points toolbar. Text toolbar. Paragraph text Toolbar. Drawing Sheets toolbar. Annotations toolbar. Material list toolbar. Dimensioning scaled details toolbar Quick dimension toggle toolbar. Dimension text edit toolbar. Dimension edit toolbar.

AutoSYS Toolbars

27

Batch Editor Lib Manager Library

Main Sheet

Standard Toolbar

Icon Origin

Pens/layers Main Layer Default Main User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 Secondary Default User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 Enhanced Layer All Layers On Select Off Select On Select change Set to entity Global Layer Vplayer Thaw in Current Thaw in select Defaults New Freeze Get Angle Timer Object Data Next Object Arc Distance

Object Properties Toolbar

28

Block

Paragraph Text

Chapter 2

Feature Swap 1.8 Text Block 2.5 Text 3.0 Text Writebloc k Wblockall Slot Offset/2 3.5 Text 5.0 Text 7.5 Text 10 Text D Terminal Measure Edit Block List block Remake Section Detail Scale Detail Label Rescale At Int To End Between Change Update To Entity Override Equal At line Title Revision Amend Cloud Title On Title Off Mark IP mark curve leader Break IP Item List only Import Part No Weight Reset Text Box Rectangle Offset" Extend Many Offset/2" Midline Multi edit Text Box Portion Break Continue Join Line To Point Break To Lower Scale Rotate Special Edit Copy Rot Move Rot Dim Edit Drawing Sheets To Upper Pick Fillet Copy Trim Many Between 2 Lines

THE AUTOSYS INTERFACE

Parallel

Hatch 45 Hatch 135

Draw Toolbar

Modify Toolbar

Line Text 1.8 Text 2.5 Text 3.0 Text 3.5 Text 5.0 Text 7.5 Text 10 Text D

AutoSYS Toolbars

29

Dimension Dialog

Reset Dimlfac Dimlfac to Vport 2:1 2.5:1 5:1 7.5:1 10:1 25.4:1 1:2 Enlarged

Update to Current Set dimstyle to object Dim override

Edit Text Default Distance Add Dia Add PCD Add AF Add Degrees Add x45 Add Drill Dia Add OA Add Check Against Add Typ. Add Ref User Suffix User Prefix Dimtofl Dimtad Dimtix Dimsoxd Dimse1 Dimse2 Associative

Dimension Toolbar

Xref Attributes Main

As for AutoCAD

Zoom All Scale Vports Create Other Toolbars

Refpoint Ref to 0 Ref to 45

3
GETTING STARTED

This chapter explains how to create an AutoSYS drawing and covers the basic knowledge necessary to use AutoSYS. This chapter covers
n n n n

Starting AutoSYS Creating and opening AutoSYS drawings Using menus Using commands

31

32

Chapter 3

GETTING STARTED

Starting AutoSYS
To start AutoSYS
n

Start AutoSYS using the following method.

Windows

From the Oasys Software Utilities folder double-click the Application Loader icon. Or select the Application Loader icon from the Windows Desktop

AutoSYS must be Set-up and configured correctly prior to starting. For details on AutoSYS Set-up and configuration refer to the Part 4 of this manual

Creating a New Drawing

Before any drawing begins AutoSYS must set up the drawing environment. This is achieved by setting options in the AutoSYS Drawing Set-up Dialog box. AutoSYS sets the scale, sheet size, space, text font etc. There are two parts to setting up a drawing in AutoSYS. Firstly AutoSYS establishes a client environment (layers, dimstyles etc.) which is maintained for the particular drawing file as a whole. Secondly AutoSYS provides for individual drawing sheets to be attached to each layout tab. Only one client can be defined for a file but any number of different drawing sheet sizes (as defined by the client) can be attached to any number of layout tabs. The initial setup does both tasks, the client environment is set up for the file and a sheet is attached to a selected layout tab. Additional layout tabs are set up using a different command, explained later. However this is only for Paper/Model space drawings. If you choose to run Model space format then only one selection is available. Both the client and Drawing sheet are attached to the model tab only. When AutoSYS has completed the Set-up you will see a grey boarder which indicates the area inside the specified paper size which you can draw on without infringing on the title block.

Creating a New Drawing

33

To begin a new drawing 1. New drawings are created via the Create New Drawing Dialog box. This dialog will be displayed on entry into AutoCAD. Once in AutoCAD you begin a new drawing by selecting the NEW DRAWING icon or From the File menu choose New.

2. In the Create New Drawing Dialog box, make one of the following choices to start a new drawing (the two Wizard choices are made obsolete by using AutoSYS):
Choose Use a Template, and then choose a template to establish your

drawing settings.
Choose Start from Scratch and select one of the two measurement

systems.

34

Chapter 3

GETTING STARTED

Setting up a new drawing After creating a new drawing you will be presented with the AutoSYS Drawing Set-up Dialog. This dialog allows you to establish not only the drawing area and sheet size but also the drawing environment required.

1. Under Paper Parameters, select a client name from the Client Name list box. The system come with one STANDARD client installed. 2. Under Plot scale, select the scale. 3. For Paper Size, select a drawing border sheet size. 4. Check the Title data box. This will insert the title data attributes block and allow you to edit the information in the drawing sheet title.

Client or Project Based Set-up

35

5. Check the allow data uplink box. This allows data entered in the previous step to be copied into the drawing sheets attached to other layout tabs set up later. 6. Choose OK The drawing will now be set-up according to the parameters selected. For detailed information on the AutoSYS Drawing Set-up Dialog see DPQ_RESCALE in the Part 3 of this manual.

Client or Project Based Set-up

The Client Name specified when creating, or re-scaling a drawing is an important part to the way AutoSYS sets up a drawing. The Client Name specifies which set of drawing sheets, title blocks, revision lists, material lists,

36

Chapter 3

GETTING STARTED

plotter configuration parameter files, and the set of initiation files to use when the drawing is created. You can have a different set of drawing sheets for each of your clients, or for different projects. The Set-up for one Client Name may have a completely different Set-up for text, dimensions, support directories etc. to that of any other Client Name. For more information on defining Client Name codes, see Part 4 of this manual.

Command System
Commands can be typed on the keyboard, selected from a screen menu, or selected from a menu on a digitising tablet. AutoSYS utilises all the input methods interactively with the emphasis placed on reducing operator input from the keyboard.

Pointing Devices
The buttons on your pointing device are used to select commands from menus, specify points on the graphics screen, and to select drawing objects. The first button of either a mouse or digitiser puck is assign for this use, and is called the pick button. Depending on the pointing device you have determines the functionality of other buttons. The right mouse button (or button 2 on a digitiser) is usually assigned as a return button. This button has the same effect as pressing the Enter key on your keyboard. the middle button (or button 3 on a digitiser) is used to pop up the snap overrides dialog, AutoSYS assigns the forth button , where possible to execute the ERASE command.

Windows Menus
The use of toolbar menus in 2000 as the primary command source enables almost instant selection of the desired command. The Windows graphical user interface also allows commands to be invoked from pull-down menus.

Tablet Menus
To use the tablet menu for selecting commands, position the crosshairs of the puck over the box which contains the command and press the pick button. The use of tablet menus as the primary command source enables almost instant selection of the desired command from a very large choice, as all the possible choices can be seen at a glance.

Command System

37

Other Menus
Pull-down and icon menus are also used extensively. Throughout the system, all the possible command methods offered by AutoCAD are used, often in combination. This is designed to achieve the most effective user interaction depending on the type of information that needs to be displayed, and the sequences or form of users choices. The aim is to reduce the need for typing on the keyboard, and to make choices as obvious as possible.

Default Responses
AutoSYSs command prompts and user response conventions generally adhere to those used in standard AutoCAD. As in standard AutoCAD, the user should always watch the command prompt area even when using tablet or screen menu commands. AutoSYS often offers default values as answers to many of its prompts. These sometimes provide the most frequent response, and at other times they offer the last input given by the user to a similar question. The default input can be chosen by pressing the ENTER key, or the mouse/cursor button that is programmed as ENTER. Prompts, options and defaults that appear in the command prompt area follow the same conventions as used by AutoCAD. Default input, options or values are enclosed in angle brackets (< >) as in the normal AutoCAD convention. Command: dpq_offset/2 Offset distance <50.0>: Options are separated by slashes and the desired option can be selected by typing the capitalised letters, as in AutoCAD. Command: dpq_rectangle I.P.(TLeft/Top/TRight/CLeft/Centre/CRight/BLeft/Bottom/BRight)<BLeft>: To select an option enter the capitalised letter/letters, or enter the whole option name. For example to select the TRight option, enter tr at the prompt. You can also respond to some "Yes/No" prompts using the mouse/cursor buttons. The default option is selected by pressing the ENTER button while the other option can be, in addition to typing the capitalised letter, selected by pressing the third button on your pointing device.

38

Chapter 3

GETTING STARTED

Drawing Sheets

Visibility
When an AutoSYS drawing is created, the full drawing sheet by default is not visible. Instead a grey outline representing the drawing area inside the sheet is shown. This has been done so the overhead of the sheet is minimal while moving around your drawing, and if for any reason drawing regeneration is required you dont have to wait for the sheet to be displayed. If however your sheet is not complicated, i.e. it doesnt have a lot of solid fill, or use complex text fonts you may have the sheet displayed all the time. For details on keeping your drawing sheet visible see the Part 4 of this manual. To turn on the visibility of the drawing sheet
n

Start the DPQ_SHEETON command by selecting

2000

From the Drawing Sheets toolbar choose Title Visible

To turn off the visibility of the drawing sheet

n

Run the DPQ_SHEETOFF command by selecting

2000

From the Drawing Sheet toolbar choose Title Invisible

Viewing the Extents

AutoCAD has many methods of moving around your drawing, zooming and panning, named views etc. At some stage you may want to view the part of drawing bound by the drawing sheet. If all of your drawing is within the sheet you could use an AutoCAD zoom command, however if part of your drawing extends past the sheet an AutoCAD zoom may show you more than you wish. To zoom to the drawing sheet extents
n

Start the FULL SHEET macro by selecting

2000

From the Drawing Sheets toolbar choose Full Sheet

When an AutoSYS drawing is created a view containing the drawing sheet is saved. The view is named dpq_mainsheet. The dpq_mainsheet view may be changed at any time to reflect a movement in the drawing sheet away from its initial position (0,0,0). Moving the sheet away from the origin is not recommended if you wish to use AutoSYSs plotting functions.

Drawing Sheets

39

To create a new drawing sheet full sheet view 1. Zoom to display the entire drawing sheet. 2. Enter view at the command prompt. 3. Enter s at the command prompt to save the current view displayed. 4. Enter dpq_mainsheet for the view name. Creating Multiple layouts Multiple layouts are only available when the drawing has been set up for Paper/Model space in the drawing setup dialog. When Paper/Model format has been chosen any number of layouts can be created and drawing sheets attached to them. The drawing sheets available is determined by the client the drawing file has been set up for. There can only be one client defined for each drawing file 1. Start the DPQ_NEWTAB command by selecting the Set-up New layout button from the Drawing sheets toolbar.

2. From the Setup New Layout Tab dialog make choose the sheet size required and scale for the viewport that will be created. 3. Check the Allow Data Uplink box and the Import from Tab Box
39

40

Chapter 3

GETTING STARTED

4. Hit OK when completed. A drawing sheet placed in the layout, a viewport will be created (if one does not already exist) and scaled to suit the scale chosen in the dialog. Refer to the command section in Part3 for more details.

Opening Drawings
To work on an existing drawing you need to open it. If you are already in an existing drawing you will be prompted to save the drawing when you open another one. AutoSYS will also prompt you, if you have set the save to floppy option in the AutoSYS preferences, to save the existing file to floppy disk before opening another one. To open an existing drawing 1. From the File menu choose Open 2. The AutoCAD Save Dialog box appears

Choose Save to save the current drawing before opening the next drawing. 3. The Select File Dialog box appears.

Saving Drawings

41

4. In the File Name list double-click on one of the file names. You can also enter the drawing name in the File Name edit box and then choose OK. 5. If the drawing being opened was not created with AutoSYS, then the AutoSYS Drawing Set-up Dialog box appears. Enter values for scale and sheet size appropriate to the drawing being opened.

Saving Drawings
Drawings should be saved frequently so the information in the drawing is securely saved to hard disk. Until you save the drawing any changes made to the drawing since the last save is likely to be lost if an error occurs, or power is lost to the computer. To save a drawing
n

From the File menu choose Save or Save AS

Command line equivalent QSAVE

Ending AutoSYS
If the most recent changes have not been saved then AutoCAD will prompt you to save the changes before exiting AutoCAD. If all changes have been saved, then the Save Dialog box is not displayed. If you have the save to floppy option enabled, AutoSYS will prompt you to save the file to a floppy disk drive.

41

4
DRAWING AND PRECISION

AutoCAD has many drawing tools to create objects from the basic elements, lines, circles, arcs etc. AutoSYS provides customised drawing tools to make the task of drawing objects faster. While drawing objects, it is essential that objects are precisely placed. With AutoSYSs precision commands objects can be drawn or edited at precise relative co-ordinates. When draw commands are run, AutoSYS interrogates the current setting and sets the current layer to a non reserved layer. This is done to ensure that drawing objects are not placed on layers reserved for annotations. This chapter covers
n n n

Draw line objects, parallel, midline and rectangles. Draw circle objects Precisely draw and locate objects

43

44

Chapter 4

DRAWING AND PRECISION

Drawing Rules
In AutoCAD, there are two types of objects, Those that show the parts we are drawing (drawing objects) and annotations (dimensions, notes, title sheets etc.) that describe the objects. Most, if not all CAD standards require annotations to be placed on special layers. When draw commands are initiated, AutoSYS interrogates the current settings to ensure that draw objects are not placed on layers reserved for annotations. Also, when annotations are placed, such as Text, dimensions, material list revisions and title sheet placement, AutoSYS ensures these are located on the correct layers. Thereby ensuring all drawings are created to a defined standard.

Adding Lines
Drawing lines is one of the most fundamental tasks of drawing. Lines can be created by various methods, the simplest is from a point to point. AutoSYS has customised this basic task so line objects can be created easily for a number of drawing situations.

Drawing a Rectangle
A rectangle drawn with line, or polyline objects can be created at any size, angle or base point. To draw a rectangle 1. Start the DPQ_RECTANGLE command by selecting
2000

From the Draw toolbar, choose Rectangle

2. Choose Bottom Left from the dialog to specify the base point of the rectangle to be the bottom left hand corner 3. Specify the base point for the rectangle (1). 4. Specify an angle for the horizontal side of the rectangle (2). 5. Enter a distance for the horizontal side. 6. Enter a distance for the vertical side. 7. Enter l to specify that the rectangle be constructed using line objects.

Drawing Circles

45

Parallel Line
It is often necessary to construct a line parallel to an existing line or polyline. To a line parallel to an existing line 1. Start the DPQ_PARALLEL command by selecting From the Draw menu, choose Line, then Parallel Line 2. Select the line (1). 3. Enter a value for the offset distance 4. Specify the start point (2) The start point can be either side of the line, and at any angle to the point selected on the line. The true start point will be calculated perpendicular from the point you select to the line at the offset distance. 5. Specify the endpoint (3) The snap angle will change to be the same angle as the line selected.

Drawing Circles
Drawing circles is an integral part of constructing just about any drawing. Continually drawing circles which are standard sizes, particularly on mechanical drawings, can become tedious. You can use AutoSYSs metric and imperial circle macros to draw standard diameter circles in either metric or imperial sizes. To draw a metric size hole 1. Start the metric hole macro by selecting From the Draw menu, choose Circle, then Metric Holes, then 10 2. Specify a centre point for the circle. To draw an English size hole 1. Start the imperial hole macro by selecting From the Draw menu, choose Circle, then , English Sizes, then 1/4

46

Chapter 4

DRAWING AND PRECISION

2. Specify a centre point for the circle. Hole sizes are specified as a diameter.

Drawing With Precision

Drawing with precision in the long run will save you time. While AutoCAD has many methods of drawing accurately, i.e. object snaps, grid snap etc. AutoSYS has additional methods which will help make draw with precision and speed.

Specify Distance at an Angle Determining Angles

You can quickly determine an angle by specifying two lines. Because AutoCAD defines the angle of a line based on its start point this function displays both the acute and obtuse angles made by the lines. To display the angle between two lines 1. Start the DPQ_GETANGLE command by selecting From the Assist menu, choose Inquiry, then Angular 2. Select the first line (1) 3. Select the second line (2) A report of the angles appears at the command line. First Angle : 25.3 Other Angle : 334.7

Object Snap Overrides

When you need to draw or edit objects using the same object snap for each consecutive operation, it is worthwhile setting a running object snap. i.e. the object snap remains in effect for all pick points until it is turned off. AutoSYS provides a quick method of turning on a single object snap override. If you wish to stack the object snaps use AutoCADs Running Object Snap Dialog box.
n

Start an object snap override by selecting one of the snap modes from the Osnap Overrides table menu.

The osnap overrides are transparent, and can be specified while a command is in use.

Drawing Information

47

Drawing Information
Information on your drawing can be displayed at any time. The information relates to the way in which the drawing was either, initially Set-up when you created it, or rescaled values, if you have since rescaled the drawing. The general information on the drawing includes
n n

Current drawing settings such as, scale, name, sheet size etc.. Text style settings

To display drawing information

n

Start the current drawing macro by selecting From the AutoSYS pulldown menu, choose AutoSYS Status

Time Spent in Drawing

To help with keeping an accurate record of the time spent in a drawing AutoSYS has a stop watch function. If you plan to be away from your drawing for a period of time you dont wish to have recorded as drawing time you can turn off the timer by using the stop watch. The stop watch function is a toggle, i.e. it will set the timer from on to off, and from off to on.

48

Chapter 4

DRAWING AND PRECISION

To turn drawing timer on or off

n

Start the stop watch macro by selecting

r14

From the Assist menu, choose Inquiry, then Stop Watch From the Inquiry tablet menu, choose Time

5
DISPLAY CONTROL

In addition to AutoCADs display commands AutoSYS provides additional methods to zoom around your drawing and to display visual elements. This chapter covers
n n n

A zoom function which will always display your title sheet Zoom at the screen ratio Controlling visual aids

49

50

Chapter 5

DISPLAY CONTROL

Displaying the Full Sheet

After zooming around your drawing during the normal course of drawing and editing it becomes necessary to display the overall picture. This is usually so you can see the balance of the drawing objects within your drawing sheet. AutoSYSs full sheet macro accomplishes this quickly and without regard to additional objects drawn outside the drawing sheet. This zoom command will only display the extents of the drawing sheet. To zoom to the extents of the drawing sheet
n

Start the full sheet macro by selecting From the View menu choose Zoom then Full Sheet

The display will now show the extents of your drawing title sheet. When an AutoSYS drawing is created a view containing the drawing sheet is saved. The view is named dpq_mainsheet. The dpq_mainsheet view may be changed at any time to reflect a movement in the drawing sheet away from its initial position (0,0,0). To create a new drawing sheet full sheet view 1. Enter view at the command prompt. 2. Enter s at the command prompt to save the current view. 3. Enter dpq_mainsheet at the command prompt.

Zoom In - Aspect Ratio

Zooming in using AutoCADs ZOOM Window command will display all the objects that you windowed, however because the aspect ratio of the window you specified and the aspect ratio of your current Viewport is likely to be different, the view displayed will be different to the one specified by your window. Of course using AutoCADs ZOOM Dynamic will overcome this because the view box you specify is at the screen aspect ratio. If you want to zoom in using this method then it can be tedious waiting for the whole of the virtual screen to be displayed, especially if the part of the drawing you want to zoom to is the last part to be re drawn. AutoSYS DPQ_DZOOM command provides you with a method of zooming into an area which you know will fill the whole of the current Viewport, without having to wait for a view of the drawing extents to appear.

Zoom In - Aspect Ratio

51

To zoom in at the aspect ratio of the current Viewport 1. Start the DPQ_DZOOM command by selecting From the View menu choose Zoom then Dzoom
[T3-Q23]

From the Display tablet menu area, choose DZ

2. When the view box showing an X appears, drag the view box around the screen to pan to a different area.

3. To zoom in press the pick button on your pointing device. The X in the view box will be replaced with an arrow on the right hand side of the view box. The left hand side of the view box will be fixed horizontally.

Resize the view box by dragging the border to the right or left. Reposition the view box by dragging the border up or down. You can switch between resizing the view box, and moving the view box by pressing the pick button. 4. When you have made the view box the size you want, and it is in the right position press The image inside the view box will become the current view. This command can be used to do a half screen pan, as well as being able to zoom out by making the view box bigger.

52

Chapter 5

DISPLAY CONTROL

Displaying Visual Elements

Some visual elements which are either drawing aids, or drawing objects can be turned on or off to speed up drawing, or displayed in a different manner.

Ortho
Ortho mode controls the way in which the rubber band effect functions. If Ortho mode is on then the cursor is restricted to the horizontal or vertical axis. When off the cursor follows the angle you drag to. To turn Ortho on and off
n

[T1-G11] From the Toggle tablet menu area, choose Ortho Ortho will be either turned on or off depending on the state of the Ortho mode prior to selection. i.e. if Ortho was on, then it will be turned off.

Blips
Blips are small temporary crosses drawn on the graphics screen to indicate the pick points or object selection points you specify. Blips disappear when a REDRAW or REGEN is performed. To turn blips on and off
n

[T1-G7] From the Toggle tablet menu area, choose Blips Blips will be either turned on or off depending on the state of the blip mode prior to selection. i.e. if blips where on, they will be turned off.

Highlight
When an object is selected by an editing command with highlighting on the object will be identified, either as a series of dots, or on some displays a different colour. If a large number of objects are selected performance is inhibited. To turn highlight on and off
n

[T1-G8] From the Toggle tablet menu area, choose Hilite Highlight will be either turned on or off depending on the state of the highlight mode prior to selection. i.e. if highlight where on, then it would be turned off.

Displaying Visual Elements

53

Grips
Within blocks grips can either be displayed on every object in the block, or just on the insertion point of the block. To assign grips to every object within a block
n

[T1-G16] From the Toggle tablet menu area, choose Grip Block Grips within blocks will be either turned on or off depending on the state of the gripblock mode prior to selection. i.e. if grips within blocks where on, they will be turned off.

Rotate Cross Hairs

The angle of the cross hairs can be rotated to facilitate drawing at an angle, especially when used in conjunction with the ORTHO mode. To rotate the cross hairs to the angle of a line or polyline 1. Shift Right Click the mouse and choos Snap to Line from the Pop up mneu. 2. Select a line or polyline Selecting a line which appears to be at 0o, or 90o, may in fact be drawn at 180o or 270o respectfully. If the cross hairs are rotated through 90o errors will be experienced in subsequent commands relying on the snap angle being set to 0o.

Reset Cross Hairs to Zero

If the cross hairs have been rotated, setting them back to zero is performed by this macro. To reset cross hair rotation to zero degrees
n

Shift Right Click the mouse and choos Snap 0 from the Pop up mneu. This has the effect of setting the SNAPANG system variable to zero degrees.

Displaying Points
Point objects can be represented by a number of different symbols. To change point object symbols 1. [T1-G5] From the Toggle tablet menu area, choose Pdmode

54

Chapter 5

DISPLAY CONTROL

2. Enter a value. Refer to AutoCAD POINT command documentation for values.

6
EDITING METHODS

AutoSYS provides many additional editing functions to enhance the productivity of AutoCAD. This chapter covers
n n n n

Breaking lines Extend and trim lines Copy, Move and rotate objects Object selection settings

55

56

Chapter 6

EDITING METHODS

Controlling Object Selection

Selecting objects is fundamental to any editing session. How you perform selections is entirely of a personal preference. AutoSYS has some quick methods to change object selection settings.

Selection Sets
When prompted to select objects, depending on the current setting of the PICKADD system variable you will either
n

only able to select one selection set at a time, unless you hold down the shift key. select as many objects you wish with any number of selection sets.

To turn additive selection of objects on and off

n

[T1-G17] From the Toggle tablet menu area choose Auto Select PICKADD will be either turned on or off depending on the state of the PICKADD system variable prior to selection. i.e. if PICKADD was on, then it will be turned off.

Window Selection
The selection of objects with automatic windowing can be turned off so only single picks can be used to select objects. To turn automatic windowing on and off
n

[T1-G19] From the Toggle tablet menu area choose Auto Mode PICKAUTO will be either turned on or off depending on the state of the PICKAUTO system variable prior to selection. i.e. if PICKAUTO was on, then it will be turned off.

Breaking Lines
AutoSYS has a number of enhanced line breaking commands to speed up the removal of portions of lines.

Between Two Lines

You can remove the portion of a line between two other lines by selecting the portion to remove.

Breaking Lines

57

To remove the portion of a line between two other lines 1 Start the DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN command by selecting
2000 [T1-D6]

From the Modify menu choose Break, then Break Between From the Edit tablet menu area choose Between

2 Select the portion of line to remove (1).

Break and Change Layer

Quite often it is necessary to break a line, only to replace it with a line which represents hidden detail. The DPQ_BREAKCHANGE command achieves this in one operation. To change a portion of a line to hidden detail 1 Start the DPQ_BREAKCHANGE command by selecting
2000 [T1-D7]

From the Modify menu choose Break, then Break Change From the Edit tablet menu area choose Break Change

2 Select the portion of line to change (1). 3 Select cutting edge (2). 4 Select cutting edge (3). 5 Enter the layer name to change the line to. The line will be displayed with the linetype of the layer specified.

58

Chapter 6

EDITING METHODS

Copying Objects
Many commands will result in a copy of single or multiple objects. Offsetting copies objects at a specified distance. Midline is similar however it calculates the offset distance from the distance between two lines and halves it.

Copying and Rotating Objects

You can copy a selection of objects and rotate the copy at a specified angle. This command eliminates the need to use an additional command on the copied objects to rotate them. To copy selected objects, and rotate the copy 1 Start the DPQ_COPYROTATE command by selecting
2000 [T1-E5]

From the Construct menu choose Copy Rotate From the Edit tablet menu area choose Copy Rotate

2 Select the objects to copy. 3 Enter cen for centre 4 Specify a base point to copy from (1). 5 Specify the displacement point to copy to (2). 6 Specify the angle of rotation for the copied objects.

2 1 result

Offsetting
The offset command can be used in many drawing circumstances where it is necessary to copy existing objects at a specified distance. The DPQ_OFFSET/2 command is particularly useful when you know a diameter and you wish to offset from a centre line.

Copying Objects

59

To offset an object by a specified distance /2 1 Start the DPQ_OFFSET/2 command by selecting

2000

From the Construct menu choose Offset, then Offset/2

2 Enter a value to specify the offset distance. 3 Select the object (1). 4 Specify the side of the object to offset to (2). 5 Select the object (1). 6 Specify the side of the object to offset to (3). 5 Press to complete offset. 1 2

result

Another method of offsetting is used when you have two parallel lines and you want to offset equi-distant between them. To create a line midway between two parallel lines 1 Start the DPQ_MIDLINE command by selecting
2000 [T2-K1]

From the Construct menu choose Offset, then Midline From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Midline

2 Select the line to offset (1).

60

Chapter 6

EDITING METHODS

3 Select the second line (perpendicular snap is on by default) (2). 1

result

Of course because the linetype of lines offset are the same as the line selected to offset you may have to change the layer of the new lines. See the DPQ_CHANGELAYER command in the AutoSYS Command Reference.

Move Objects
A number of commands can be used to move objects. These may rotate the objects, or just change the position of objects without changing orientation.

Move and Rotate

Rotating objects moves the objects about a base point at a specified angle. The DPQ_MOVEROTATE command performs an additional move so the rotated objects are rotated and moved to a new position. To move and rotate objects in one operation 1 Start the DPQ_MOVEROTATE command by selecting
2000 [T1-E8]

From the Modify menu choose Move-Rotate From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Move Rotate

2 Select the objects to move. 3 Specify the base point to move the objects from (1). 4 Specify the point to move the objects to (2).

Extending and Trimming Multiple Lines

61

5 Specify the rotation angle for the objects.

2 1

result

Swapping Positions
You can move two different sets of objects independently of each other in one operation. To swap position of two sets of objects. 1 Start the DPQ_SWAP command by selecting
2000 [T1-D5]

From the Modify menu choose Swap From the Edit tablet menu area choose Swap

2 Select the first set of objects to move (s1). 3 Specify the base point to move the objects from (p1). 4 Specify the point to move the objects to (p2). 5 Select the second set of objects to move (s2). 6 Specify the base point to move the objects from (p2). 7 Specify the point to move the objects to (p1). p p2 s s result

Extending and Trimming Multiple Lines

Extending and trimming commands change the length of lines. The DPQ_TRIM and DPQ_EXTEND commands do this to a number of lines in one operation.

62

Chapter 6

EDITING METHODS

result

To extend multiple lines 1 Start the DPQ_EXTEND command by selecting

2000 [T1-E7]

From the Modify menu choose Multi Extend From the Edit tablet menu area choose Multi Extend

2 Select the object to extend to (the boundary edge) (1)(2). 3 Select the first point for a crossing window to enclose the ends of the lines to extend (3). 4 Select second point for crossing window (4). To trim multiple lines 1 Start the DPQ_TRIM command by selecting
2000 [T1-E6]

From the Modify menu choose Multi Trim From the Edit tablet menu area choose Multi Trim

2 Select the lines to cut to (1). 3 Select objects to trim (2)(3). 4 Specify the side of cut line to trim (4). 3 1 2 result 4

Filleting Objects
Filleting is the process of connecting two objects with an arc. AutoSYS has made filleting a little easier by specifying standard fillet radiuses. Also an

Filleting Objects

63

additional filleting function enables you to fillet two sets of lines keeping a constant line distance through the two radiuses. To fillet two lines with a radius of 2mm 1 Start the fillet macro by selecting
2000

From the Construct menu choose Fillet, then Fillet 2

2 Select the first line. 3 Select the second line. 1 2

result To fillet a pair of parallel lines 1 Start the DPQ_FILLET2LINES command by selecting
2000 [T1-D18]

From the Construct menu choose Fillet, then Parallel From the Edit tablet menu area choose Parallel Fillet

2 Enter the distance between the parallel lines (1). 3 Enter the inside radius (2). 4 Select the first line - inside radius (3). 5 Select the second line - inside radius (4). 6 Select the first line - outside radius (5). 7 Select the second line - outside radius (6). 6 5 1 distance

4 3 2 inside radius result

64

Chapter 6

EDITING METHODS

7
USING LAYERS

Every object you create is placed on a layer. Layers have colour and linetype properties, which in most cases the objects on that layer reflect. The structure for layers is infinite, however it is important that the layer structure you adopt has some meaning, and has a definite structure so others using your drawings can navigate through your layer names. This chapter covers
n n n n n

Layer structure Creating new layers Controlling layer visibility Setting a layer to be the current layer Changing objects from one layer to another

65

66

Chapter 7

USING LAYERS

Layer Selection
One of the key features of AutoSYS is the ability to produce drawings to any defined standard though a consistent drawing interface. When Drawing by hand we chose a particular pen from a pen stall and drew the appropriate line on our drawings. AutoSYS uses a similar method but replaces the pen stall with a pen tool bar. A subset of the pen toolbar is duplicated in the AutoSYS Object properties toolbar.

Each client definition has an associated layer defined for each pen tool. Therefore as a drafter, we dont have to know the client layering structure in order to produce drawings to their standard. All we need to do is select the correct pen, AutoSYS looks after the rest. Because layers are chosen automatically from a common toolbar, we are less likely to use incorrect layers in any drawing. This will not only reduce non compliance due to the use of incorrect layer names, but drawings will be produced much faster as we dont need to rethink the way we interact with AutoCAD just to produce drawings to a particular standard. Particularly if we are if we are working for a number of different clients with greatly differing standards.

Layer Structure

67

Layer Structure
Although AutoSYS will cater for any technical drawing standard we will be using the Australian Standard for Technical Drawing as the basis for all examples used in this manual. Technical Drawings are in effect a language by which designers convey information about their designs to other designers, manufactures or Authorities. Like any language there are rules which must be obeyed in order for the information to be interpreted without ambiguity. The basis for any technical drawing standard is how real, three dimensional objects are to be portrayed on 2 two dimensional pieces of paper. The way this is achieved is to draw parts of objects with different type of lines and different line weights. For example, an objects visible outlines are drawn using a 0.50 thick continuous line while hidden detail is drawn with 0.25 thick dashed lines. This standard defines how the final hard copy drawing is to be produced. With the introduction of Computer drafting systems we also need to define Electronic naming practices for layers, text, and drawing sheets etc. AutoCAD uses LAYERS to define line weights and line types, therefore a layering system must be defined to translate the technical drawing standards into electronic form. In most cases, every company using AutoCAD to produce technical drawings, establishes a different system of layers. AutoSYS is designed to allow any number of different client definitions to be stored on a workstation or network server. Even the most basic layer structure should have layers for different types of objects. i.e. a layer for 0.25 thick continuous lines, another for 0.35 continuous lines, and others for text, and still others for dimensions etc. Each layer has a colour, and if objects are drawn bylayer, each object on the layer will be the colour of the layer. Specifying different colours for different layers will make a layers possible use more evident. Separating different information by layers gives you the means of controlling the information viewed on the screen by turning layers on and off. Layers are also used to group associated components together so they can be easily manipulated. Thinnest line are great. You can assign your own layer structure in AutoSYS and quickly manipulate layers using AutoSYSs layer functions. AutoSYS maintains the layer structure for individual clients in a client definition file. AutoSYS ships with a single client [STANDARD] which has a basic layer definition already defined. This manual uses this layer structure in all its examples.

68

Chapter 7

USING LAYERS

Creating Basic Layers

Additional AutoSYS commands enable you to quickly create layers from a standard list of layer names, which can be easily set-up for any layer structure. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for details on creating a customised layer structure. The default layer structure in AutoSYS defines layers by colour (pen thickness), and linetype. e.g.. 5CO defines a layer with a colour which represents a .5 pen thickness and a continuous line. A whole range of these basic layers are defined for layers which represent outlines, hidden detail, centre lines, dashed lines, dimension lines, and others. Although you can define layers in your prototype drawing, AutoSYS will create layers automatically as they are used. This gives you the advantage of using AutoSYS layers in any drawing and only having the layers needed being created. This will also keep the drawing size down. To use an AutoSYS basic layer
n

Set an AutoSYS basic layer by selecting

2000 [T1-E26]

From the Layer toolbar choose From the Layers tablet menu area choose Cont under the 0.35 area.

If the 3CO layer was not in the drawing prior to this, then it will be created and set as the current layer ready for objects to be created on it. The next time you set the 0.35 continuous layer, because it is already present in the drawing, it will only be set as the current layer.

Creating Enhanced Layers

Enhanced layers are those that have a more complex naming structure. This may be required to identify a layers use more easily. e.g.. the enhanced layer name PUMP___5CO would indicate that the layer is used to draw objects specifically for a pump, and the objects are to be plotted in a 0.5 pen thickness and as a continuous linetype.

Objects on layer PUMP___5CO

Layer Structure

69

You may also want to group a number of objects on a set of layers which all relate to a specific assembly, e.g.. a pump. Although the main layer specification would be pump other parts of the pump detail could be drawn on associated layers. E.g.. the pump motor could be drawn on an enhanced layer name PUMPMTR5CO. The mtr indicating that the objects are part of the pump sub assembly.

Objects on layer PUMPMTR5CO Other layers specified for this assembly may be as follows.

Objects on layer PUMPBAS5CO

Objects on layer PUMP___2CL

70

Chapter 7

USING LAYERS

The default enhanced layer structure is as follows.

n n n n

The first four characters of the layer name is the main layer designation. The following three characters is the secondary layer designation. The next character indicates the plot (pen) thickness for the objects. The last two characters designate the linetype of the layer.

PUMP MTR 5 CO
line type plot thickness secondary layer designation main layer designation If no secondary layer designation is required the characters representing the secondary layer will be underscores. You cannot however create a secondary layer without having a main layer name. The default layer structure can be changed to suit your own layer structure. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for further details. To set an AutoSYS enhanced layer 1 Set an AutoSYS enhanced layer by selecting
2000 [T1-D21]

From the Object Properties toolbar choose From the Layers tablet menu area choose Layer

Layer Structure

71

2 From the Extended Layers area choose the Select button.

3 From the Main Layer area choose Pump. 4 From the Secondary Layer area choose Motor. 5 Choose OK. The AutoSYS Layer Control Dialog box will reappear. 6 From the Pen Size area choose 0.50 radio button 7 From the Line Type area choose Continuous. The full enhanced layer name will be displayed in the Layer Name area as you make changes. 8 Choose OK. The current Main and Secondary Layers will be displayed in the status line.

Once set they remain active until changed or the drawing is ended. The current settings for main and secondary layers are used to generate a new layer or set an existing layer when a pen is selected from the Pen toolbar.

72

Chapter 7

USING LAYERS

New layers can be set with the same main and secondary layer name designation by
n n n

specifying a different pen size in the AutoSYS Layer Control Dialog box. specifying a different linetype in the AutoSYS Layer Control Dialog box. selecting a basic layer from the either the Pen toolbars, or Layer tablet menu.

To set a layer with the current main and secondary layer names 1 Set an AutoSYS enhanced layer by selecting
2000 [T1-D21]

From the Object Properties Tool bar choose. From the Layers tablet menu area choose Layer

2 From the Pen Size area choose 0.35 radio button. 3 From the Line Type area choose Hidden from the list. 5 Choose OK.

Setting a Layer Current

Apart from the above methods for setting layers, once you have created an object on a layer you can quickly set the current layer by selecting an object on that layer.

Layer Visibility

73

To set a layer current by selecting an object 1 Start the DPQ_LAYERSET command by selecting
2000 [T1-D24]

From the Layer menu choose Make Objects Layer current From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Set To object

2 Select an object on the layer you want to set current.

Layer Visibility
The visibility of objects is dependent on whether the objects layer is on or off. The visibility of objects created on different layers can be manipulated so that what is displayed on the screen can either be more easily edited, or irrelevant information can be hidden. The principle of what you see is what you getapplies to plotting your drawing. AutoCAD will only plot what is displayed on the screen. One of the main reasons for using a structured layering system is the ability to display (or not to display ) objects based on a portion of the layer name, MAIN, SECONDARY, PEN or LINETYPE. Layer control is from the layer toolbar, which is a flyout from the Object properties toolbar.

74

Chapter 7

USING LAYERS

Turning Layers Off

Objects on layers that have been turned off are not displayed, and therefore they are not plotted. You may also wish to turn a layer off to make it easier to edit. One of the easiest methods of turning layers off is to select an object on the layer to be turned off. To turn a layer off by selecting an object 1 Start the DPQ_LAYEROFF command by selecting
2000 [T1-A29]

From the Layer menu choose Turn objects layer off From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Select - Layer Off

2 Select an object on the layer you want to be turned off. To Isolate an objects layer 1 Start the DPQ_LAYERON command by selecting
2000 [T1-A30]

From the Layer menu choose Isolate an Objects layer From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Select - All Off Except

2 Select an object on the layer you want on. Objects on all layers other than the layer the selected object is on, will be turned off.

Turning All Layers On

After turning off layers, they can be singularly turned on again using the AutoCAD DDLMODES command. If however you want all the layers that were turned off, on again, AutoSYSs ALL ON macro will quickly do this for you. To turn all layers on
n

Start the ALL ON macro by selecting

2000 [T1-D23]

From the Layer menu choose All On From the Layer tablet menu area, choose All On

All layers that were off will be turned on. Layers that have been frozen will not be turned on.

Layer Visibility

75

Layer Visibility Dialog Box

The above methods of layer visibility are limited. The AutoSYS Layer Visibility dialog box gives you greater control over the number of layers that can be manipulated in one operation. Layer visibility can be controlled by main, secondary, pen size or linetype enhanced layer designations. For example:
n n n

turn all layers off with a pen size of 0.50 freeze all layers that have a main layer name of pump turn all layers off except those with a particular secondary layer name

To turn off layers by secondary layer name 1 Start the DPQ_LAYERMODE command by selecting
2000 [T1-D25]

From the Layer menu choose Layer Control From the Layer tablet menu area, choose any of the layer visibility controls.

2 In the Selection area choose Secondary. 3 In the list box select Motor. 4 In the Control area choose Off. 5 Choose Apply. All layers that have a secondary layer name mtr will be turned off. E.g.. PUMPMTR5CO, PUMPMTR3HD, PUMPMTR2CL etc.

76

Chapter 7

USING LAYERS

To turn off layers by pen size 1 Start the DPQ_LAYERMODE command by selecting
2000 [T1-D25]

From the Layer menu choose Layer Control From the Layer tablet menu area, choose any of the layer visibility controls.

2 In the Selection area choose Pen. 3 In the list box select 0.25. 4 In the Control area choose Off. 5 Choose Apply. All layers names that have a 2 pen designation will be turned off. E.g.2CO, 2CL, PUMP___2CL etc. To turn all layers on except a pen size 1 Start the DPQ_LAYERMODE command by selecting
2000 [T1-D25]

From the Layer menu choose Layer Control From the Layer tablet menu area, choose any of the layer visibility controls.

Layer Visibility

77

2 In the Selection area choose Pen. 3 In the list box select 0.50. 4 In the Control area choose On. 5 In the Selection area choose Include (toggle off). 6 Choose Apply. All layers will be turned on other than those that have a pen designation of 5 in their layer name. E.g.. 5CO, Pump___5CO etc. If any layers with a 5 pen size designation are already on then they will remain on.

Controlling Layers in Floating Viewports

Layers can be controlled for each floating viewport in paper space, individually. This may be especially important so unnecessary information, displayed in another floating viewport, is not displayed in a specified viewport. The AutoSYS Layer Visibility dialog box is used in the same way as described in previous examples for model space viewports, however to control layers in paper space floating viewports, you need to specify from the Apply To area whether you want the layers controlled in the Current viewport, All the viewports, or a viewport you Select.
77

78

Chapter 7

USING LAYERS

Changing an Objects Layer

Objects are often created on the wrong layer. The OFFSET command for example offsets lines on the same layer as the object selected to offset. If you offset a centre line the offset objects can be changed to a continuous layer. To change an objects layer 1 Start the DPQ_CHANGELAYER command by selecting
2000 [T1-C29]

From the Layer toolba choose From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Change Layer by Selection

2 Select the objects you want to change the layer of. 3 Select an object which is on the layer which you want the selected objects changed to.

8
USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

Blocks are a collection of objects which can be manipulated as a single object. As a block the objects can be moved, copied, scaled etc. much easier than having to select all the single objects every time you want to use them. A block written to the hard disk can be used in any other drawing. By creating WBlocks of often used components you can save time by not having to recreate similar components within different drawings. Attributes are text items which can be attached to blocks, and when the block is inserted you can enter text information to be displayed, or hidden. This chapter covers
n n n

Creating blocks and wblocks Exploding blocks Redefining blocks and Wblocks

79

80

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

Working with Blocks

A block is a collection of objects you can associate together to form a single object, or a block reference. You can insert, scale, and rotate a block reference in a drawing. You can explode a block reference into its component objects, modify them, and redefine the block. AutoCAD updates all future instances of that block reference based on the definition of the block. Blocks streamline the drawing process. For example, you can use blocks to build a standard library of frequently used symbols, components, or standard parts. You can insert the same block reference numerous times instead of re-creating the drawing elements each time or revise drawings efficiently by inserting, relocating, and copying block references as components rather than individual geometric objects. Blocks save disk space by storing all references to the same block as one block definition in the drawing database. Blocks make it possible for you to organise your drawing tasks in a systematic way so you can set up, redesign, and sort the objects in your drawings and the information associated with them. Although blocks are useful tools they can be difficult to manipulate especially if they are nested in other blocks, or intermingled with other objects in your drawing. AutoSYS has identified these shortcomings and provided series of tools that make the task of creating and editing blocks to any nesting level not only inside the current drawing files but on disk as well. Access to the AutoSYS blocks commands is via the Blocks Toolbar.

Creating Blocks
Two types of blocks can be created

Creating Blocks

81

a block - created in a drawing, and can only be used in the drawing it was created in. a wblock - created as a separate drawing file on the hard disk, this type of block (.dwg file) can be used in any drawing.

Defining a Block
Any object part of your current drawing can be defined as a block as long as it is visible. Blocks can be defined within other blocks, but must not reference themselves. A block may be as simple as a line, or as complex as an assembly for an aircraft. To create a block 1 Start the DPQ_BLOCK command by selecting
2000 [T2-P2]

From the Blocks toolbar choose Block New From the Draw tablet menu area choose Block New

2 In the Internal Block Name area enter a block name. E.g. gate 3 Choose OK. 4 Specify the insertion base point (1). 5 Select the objects to be made into a block (2)(3). The block is created and will disappear from the screen. Use the OOPS

82

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

command to re display the objects as they were before, or use the INSERT command to insert the block just defined. 2

1 3 To create a block - make a slide and reinsert it as a block 1 Start the DPQ_BLOCK command by selecting
2000 [T2-P2]

From the Block Toolbar choose Block New From the Draw tablet menu area choose Block New

2 In the Internal Block Name area enter a block name. E.g.. bfly 3 In the Insert Options area choose Block. 4 In the Make Slide area choose On and Show IP (toggle on). 3 Choose OK. 4 Specify the insertion base point (1).

Creating Blocks

83

5 Select the objects to be made into a block (2)(3). The display will change so the objects selected for the block fill the screen, to create a slide. A temporary point is placed at the insertion point you specified, this is removed after the slide is created. 2

1 3 insertion objects objects zoomed into so

A block and a slide of the block is created. The block is inserted at the original position it was created at. If slides of internal blocks are created when blocks are defined you can view the blocks defined in the drawing by selecting the Block... button from the Make Block dialog box.

Defining a Wblock
Wblocks can be created either from an existing block, or be defined from objects in your drawing. To create a wblock 1 Start the DPQ_BLOCK command by selecting
2000 [T2-P2]

From the Block Toolbar Block New From the Draw tablet menu area choose Block New

84

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

2 In the Wblock Name area enter a name in Wblock Name edit box. 3 Choose OK. 4 Specify the insertion base point. 5 Select the objects to be made into a wblock. A wblock is created on the hard disk in the current DOS directory. To create a wblock from an existing internal block 1 Start the DPQ_BLOCK command by selecting
2000 [T2-P2]

From the Blocks Toolbar choose Block New From the Draw tablet menu area choose Block New

2 In the Internal Block Name choose the Block... button.

Creating Blocks

85

3 From the block list select a block name to wblock. 4 Choose OK.

5 In the Wblock Name area choose the Wblock=Block button. 6 Choose OK. The internal block is written to the hard disk in the current directory. The Insert Options are ignored during this operation as no block was created. The wblock name does not have to be the same as the block name, however care must be taken as some networks limit names to eight characters for a wblock name. A block and wblock can be defined at the same time by entering both a block name and a wblock name. You will then be prompted in the same way as defining a block.

86

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

To create wblocks of all blocks in a drawing 1 Start the DPQ_WBLOCKALL command by selecting
2000

From the Block Toolbar choose Wblock All

The wblocks being processed will be displayed. To create a wblocks from a selected block 1 Start the DPQ_WRITEBLOCK command by selecting
2000

From the Blocks Toolbar choose Wblock Select

2 Select a block in the drawing.

Explode a Block
If you want to edit any part of a block first of all you must unblock the objects that make up the block so they are single objects. This is done using the EXPLODE command. AutoSYSs DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE function explodes a block and saves information on the objects that made up the block. This is done so the block can be redefined after you have modified it, using the DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE command. The DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE function will also explode nested blocks down to the level of the object selected. Any nested blocks below will be retained as blocks. To explode a block and retain block information 1 Start the DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE function by selecting
2000 [T1-D16]

From the Blocks Toolbar choose Explode to Edit From the Edit tablet menu area choose Block - Edit

2 Select the block to explode. If you want to edit a block which has nested levels of blocks select the part of the block you want to modify. The DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE function will retain information on the nested level of the block exploded, and when you remake the block with the

Remaking Blocks

87

DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE command the block will be remade with the nested levels as defined in the original block.

m20bolt block
Nested blocks

single

m20wash m20nut block block reference reference

Explode a nested block

an object selected on the first level of the block, explodes the first level only.

an object selected on a nested level of the block, explodes the blocks to the nest level

Remaking Blocks
A block exploded, (using DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE) and modified, can be quickly redefined using the DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE command. Because a block exploded using the DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE function remembers each member of the block, and its nested level. When the block is remade the original members of the block (if they still exist) are automatically added to the block. It is the nested block (level) of the object used to select the block which is primarily redefined, although each nest level may also be redefined. You can only remake a block using this command if you have exploded the block using the AutoSYS explode command. If no blocks have been exploded using this command then DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE will display a message signifying that no blocks are exploded. 1 block to redefine To remake a simple block 1 Explode a block using the DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE command (1). 2 3 components to add to block

88

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

2 Start the DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE command by selecting

2000 [T1-E16]

From the Block Toolbar choose Remake Blocks From the Edit tablet menu area choose Remake

3 In the Parent Block area choose the block which was exploded from the popup list box. 4 Choose OK.

5 In the Wblock Name choose Make Wblock (toggle off).

Remaking Blocks

89

6 Choose OK.

7 Choose Redefine. If you want to define a block with a different name choose No which returns you to the Remake Block dialog box where you can specify a new name for the block in the Remake Block Name area. 8 Press to remove no objects from the original block to remake. 9 Select the objects to add to the block (2)(3). 10 Press to use the insertion point of the original block. The block will be redefined, and inserted at its present position as a block.

Nested Blocks
To edit nested blocks it is necessary to explode each level of the block containing the nested block until you are able to explode the block you want to modify. AutoSYSs Explode to Edit function will explode a nested block to the level of the nested block selected. When remaking a nested block each block contained will be redefined. 1

Original Block

nested

Redefined Block

To remake a nested block 1 Explode a block (which contains a nested block) using the DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE command (1). 2 Make modifications to exploded block.

90

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

3 Start the DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE command by selecting

2000 [T1-E16]

From the Block Toolbar choose Remake Block From the Edit tablet menu area choose Remake

4 In the Parent Block area choose the block which was exploded from the popup list box. Choosing a block name from the Child Block area will show an image of the nested block (if a slide was created when the block was made). 5 Choose OK.

6 Enter a new name in the Remake Block Name area. This example will create a new block and will not redefine the original block.

Remaking Blocks

91

7 In the Wblock Name choose Make Wblock (toggle off). 8 Choose OK. Since this will define a new block you will not be warned that you are about to redefine an existing block. 9 Select objects to remove from the original block (hi lighted), or press to remove no objects from the original block to remake. 10 Select the objects to add to the block, or press L 11 Specify a point or press L to use the insertion point of the original block.

12 Enter a new name in the Remake Block Name area. This example will create a new block and will not redefine the original block. 13 Choose OK. If you choose to keep the same name for the block and redefine it a warning box will appear. The block will be inserted at its present position as a block.

92

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

Working with Attributes

An attribute provides an interactive label or tag for you to attach text to a block. Whenever you insert a block that has a variable attribute, AutoCAD prompts you to enter the data to be stored with the block. Examples of data are part numbers, prices, comments, and owners' names. Attribute creation and editing can be divided into two groups
n n

Attribute definitions before being build into blocks Attribute data entered into or obtained from inserted blocks

The Attribute Toolbar provided with AutoSYS is built on the one supplied with AutoCAD with the addition of a few useful utilities to make working with Attributes data much easier. The tools to create and edit the attribute definitions are well catered for with regular AutoCAD.

Define Attribute Definitions

Attributes are defined using the DDATTDEF command. This AutoCAD commands can be accessed from the standard AutoCAD Attribute Toolbar or from the Modified AutoSYS Attribute Toolbar shown above. Define Attribute

Edit Attribute Definitions

You can use the AutoCAD commands DDEDIT DDMODIFY or the AutoSYS DPQ_DDMODIFY to edit an attribute definitions before they are associated with a block.

Editing Attribute Data

After a block containing attributes has been inserted the attributes can be modified using the DDATTE command. AutoSYS makes available single block selection, and multiple block selection to edit attributes in a block. Choose Edit Attribute or Edit Multiple Attributes from the Attributes Toolbar.

Working with Attributes

93

Edit Global This command macro uses the AutoCAD ATTEDIT command to perform a string search and replace on multiple blocks with attributes.

Editing Attribute Data Properties

Changing the style of an attribute once it is part of a block reference can also be done using AutoCADs ATTEDIT command. Edit Attribute and Edit Local have been provided. All three commands are just extensions of the AutoCAD ATTEDIT command, to do specific tasks Although the DDATTE command allows you to edit attributes, it applies to one attribute at a time. If you have the need to change a specific string in a number of attributes, the ATTEDIT command will do this.

Refreshing Redefined Attribute Data

When a block is redefined, redefinition affects previous as well as future insertions of a block. Constant attributes are lost and replaced by any new constant attributes. Variable attributes however remain unchanged, even if the new block has no attributes. Two commands are available to redefine a block and update associated attributes within blocks.
n

ATTREDEF is an AutoCAD command which works only on blocks contained within a drawing DPQ_ATTREDEF which redefines an internal block from an external file and updates tag names as well as retain data.

Attribute Dialog Control

When a block is inserted that contains attributes, the attributes values can be entered either on the command line, or via a dialog box. The ATTDIA system variable controls this. If ATTDIA is 0 (off) the attributes are entered at the command prompt, if it is 1 (on) a dialog box is displayed.

93

94

Chapter 8

USING BLOCKS, ATTRIBUTES, & XREFS

External Reference Drawings

External reference drawings (xrefs) can be attached to your drawing. By attaching a xref to your drawing you can reference information from another drawing without significantly increasing the size of your drawing. Objects in the xref can be selected, but cannot be edited apart from colour and linetype. AutoCAD 2000(and r14) has a much better xref interface than r13 which makes working with External References file much easier, however when you wish to detach a file you can choose to use the AutoCAD dialog interface or select the external reference using the AutoSYS command version.

9
TEXT

Every drawing you produce will have text, so it is important this is an easy task. When you create a new drawing AutoSYS sets up text styles to suit the scale of the drawing. AutoSYS also has many text functions for creating and editing text. This chapter covers
n n

Creating text Editing text

95

96

Chapter 9

TEXT

Working With Text

Any text entered on a drawing will have a text style associated with it. This style contains the make-up of the text, i.e. font type, height, orientation etc. Except for the default STANDARD style, you must create any text style that you want to use. New text inherits height, width factor, obliging angle, backwards, upside-down, and vertical alignment properties from the current text style. Setting up, maintaining and having drafters adhere to a standard range of text styles within an organisation can be a major problem for a CAD system manager running a single client. It becomes almost impossible when number of different client, discipline or project definition are need to be maintained. AutoSYS provides a simple pick and point method of placing text. Simply select the text height from a Toolbar for TEXT or MTEXT and then where you want it on the drawings. AutoSYS selects the correct font, style and layer and places the text accordingly.

Text styles can be created using one of two methods, Fixed and Dynamic. Fixed height styles have a unique style created for each text height. Dynamic or 0 height styles use a single style name, the height for each text object is defined when the text is placed. AutoSYS honours both methods. The text format used is set in the individual client definition files. When a new drawing is created with AutoSYS, styles necessary to control different text heights are created automatically for the scale specified in the AutoSYS Drawing Set-up dialog box.

Creating Text

97

AutoSYS allows for a number of different fonts defined for text. All text will be placed using the current font selected. When placing text in your drawing, AutoSYS identifies the text location and automatically sets the (scaled) text height as shown below. Text Scaling Location in Drawing Paper Space Model space viewports Model Space Viewport Bounding boxes Text Height Scale Factor 1.0 The scale of the viewport The scale of the drawing The scale of the bounding box

If the a particular client uses a fixed height text format, this will be honoured, however, text placed in viewport bounding boxes and model space viewports must use a Dynamic (0 height) Text style. AutoSYS also controls the layer for each standard text height so when text is entered, it is placed on the correct layer. If you wish to create text that is outside AutoSYSs text standards use the AutoCAD MTEXT, DTEXT or TEXT commands. All AutoCAD text input methods (TEXT DTEXT and MTEXT) are honoured in AutoSYS.

Creating Text
To create one or more lines of text at a standard height, i.e. 2.5, 3.5, 5.0, 7.0, etc. AutoSYS has Set-up styles and a specific layer for each height. When you select a height to create text with, the layer and style to be used will be set. To create line text 1 Start a standard AutoSYS text height by selecting
2000 [T2-J2]

From the Text Toolbar choose a text height From the Draw tablet menu area choose a text height

You will notice that the current layer will change to that used for the text height selected. 2 Specify a point to start the text line. 3 Specify an angle for the text.

98

Chapter 9

TEXT

4 Enter text and press to move to the next line of text. 5 Enter more text, or press on a blank line to end the text command. The layer which was current prior to using the text command will be restored as the current layer. The text will be at the height selected multiplied by the scale of the drawing as indicated in the table. AutoCAD has text functions to create paragraph text. Text created as a paragraph is recognised by AutoCAD as one object and therefore has advantages when it is moved or edited. To create multiline text 1 Start a standard AutoSYS text height by selecting
2000

From the Paragraph Text Toolbar choose a text height

You will notice that the current layer will change to that used for the text height selected. 2 Define a window to enclose the text by specifying two points. 3 Enter text in the Edit MTEXT dialog box. 4 Choose OK. The layer which was current prior to using the text command will be restored as the current layer. The paragraph text will be at the height selected multiplied by the scale of the drawing. All AutoSYS text functions access the client font style as specified for each client. Earlier versions of AutoSYS only allowed for one font style to be defined for each client. This version has the capacity to define any number of fonts style to be used, however only one style can be used at any one time. A new command has been added to allow the user to specify the current font to be used, all text functions used will then use the new font style until it is changed or the drawing is ended. To set the current style format 1 Start a standard AutoSYS text height by selecting
2000

From either the Text or Paragraph Text Toolbar choose Set an Alternate Font.

Creating Text

99

The Alternate Font dialog will be displayed.

2 Select the style from the list of choices. The current font name will be displayed in the status bar.

Setting up Alternate font is described in the Customisation section of this manual. To place a box around text A rectangle with any specified offset can be created around any line text. The line text can be part of a block object. The box created around text which is part of a block will not become part of the block. The rectangle is constructed using a polyline with the current pline width, and is drawn on the current layer. 1 Start the Box Text Command by selecting 2000 From the Text Toolbar choose Box Text

Offset/<Select text string>: 2 Enter O,

100

Chapter 9

TEXT

Text box offset: <0.0> : 3 Enter the offset distance Offset/<Select text string>: 4 Pick text: Use an object selection method, or press L A box will now be placed around the selected text

Editing Line Text

After text has been placed on your drawing it can be changed. AutoSYS has various text editing commands which allow you to modify the way line text appears.

To continue a line of text from an existing line 1 Start the DPQ_TXTCONT by selecting
2000

From the Edit Text Toolbar Choose Cont. Text

Editing Line Text

101

2 Select the text line to continue (1). 3 Enter text and press L to move to the next line of text. 4 Enter more text, or press L on a blank line to end the text command. The new lines of text will have the same properties as the text line selected. To break a line of text 1 Start the DPQ_TXTBRK by selecting
2000

From the Edit Text Toolbar Choose Break Text

2 Select the line of text to break (1). 1 3 Enter a unique string at the start of the break e.g. 2.5 4 Press to continue broken text on the next line. The new line of text will have the same properties as the original text line selected. To change a text line to lower case 1 Start the DPQ_TXTLOWER command by selecting 1
2000

From the Edit Text Toolbar Choose To Lower

2 Select the line of text to change to lower case (1). To change a text line to upper case 1 Start the DPQ_TXTUPPER command by selecting 1
2000

From the Edit Text Toolbar Choose To Upper

2 Select the line of text to change to upper case (1). To change selected text lines with new text 1 Start the DPQ_TXTRPL command by selecting
2000

From the Edit Text Toolbar Choose Pick Replace

101

102

Chapter 9

TEXT

2 Select the lines of text to change (1)(2). 1 2

Original Text

New Text

3 Enter new text, 231 4 Enter new text, 233 Text is replaced in the order it is specifically selected. Selecting text using window or crossing will result in the text being replaced in an unknown order.

10
DIMENSIONS

AutoSYS creates a dimensioning environment so any dimensions created are done so with a consistent format, and layer. This chapter covers
n n

Dimension settings and styles Limits, tolerances, and units

103

104

Chapter 10

DIMENSIONS

Dimensioning Concepts
AutoSYS is designed to make dimensioning as easy as possible. As a drafter all you are interested in, when dimensioning is, that the dimension is formatted correctly to an established standard, the tolerance values (if required) are correct and the location of the Dimension whether it is in either Model Space, Paper Space or Model Space Viewports. AutoCAD has 59 system variable which control all aspects of the format for the dimension. Maintaining all 59 (even with Dimension styles) to produce dimension to a repeatable standard can be a daunting task. When a new drawing is created AutoSYS generates a set of dimension styles to the standard set up for the client selected. Each time the drawing is edited the styles are investigated to make sure scaling layer, text and colours are still to the defined standard. AutoSYS provides an easily manageable system of dimensioning via a simple dialog where the user selects the type of dimension required, tolerance values and decimal places. Then using the standard AutoCAD dimensioning commands places the dimension as required. AutoSYS maintains the layer, dimension scale, linear scale and formatting to the set standard for the current client, whether the dimension is placed in Model Space, Paper Space, Model Space Viewports, Viewport Bounding Boxes or enlarged or reduced details in Viewport Bounding Boxes. AutoSYS has functions to regenerate styles from the client set-up at any time if the styles have become corrupted The default styles have been structured around the AS1100 drawing standard.

Dimensioning in Model Space

You can draw dimensions in both paper space and model space. However, if the geometry you're dimensioning is in model space, it's better to draw dimensions in model space, because AutoCAD places the definition points of each dimension in the same space where the geometry is drawn. AutoSYS sets the dimension scale and linear scale of the dimension according to the scale of the drawing as established with the AutoSYS drawing set-up or the currently active Viewport Bounding Box. If there is a currently active Viewport Bounding Box then the Dimension scale (DIMSCALE) and the Linear scale (DIMLFAC) is set by the Scale and linear scale defined for that particular Viewport Bounding Box. All dimensions are created on the default dimension layer as defined for each individual client. Whenever a dimension command is used the AutoSYS dimension layer is set prior to the dimension being created, then after the dimension the current layer prior to the dimension command is restored.

Dimensioning Settings

105

All other formatting is controlled by the dimension styles generated for the client selected in each drawing.

Dimensioning in Paper Space

If you draw a dimension in paper space that describes geometry in your model, the paper space dimension does not change when you use editing commands or change the magnification of the display in the model space viewport. The location of the paper space dimensions also stays the same when you change a view from paper space to model space. If you're dimensioning in paper space and the global scale factor for linear dimensioning (the DIMLFAC system variable) is set at less than 0, the distance measured is multiplied by the absolute value of DIMLFAC. AutoSYS controls the dimension scale and linear scale based on where in Paper Space the dimension is placed. If the dimension is placed over a Model Space Viewport the scale is set to 1.0 and the Linear scale (DIMLFAC) is set to the scale of the viewport. Dimensions placed elsewhere in Paper Space will have the Dimension scale and the Linear scale both set to 1.0. AutoSYS controls dimension layers in floating viewports by creating a unique layer for dimensions in each floating viewport, based on the default dimension layer name. All other formatting is controlled by the dimension styles generated for the client selected in each drawing.

Dimensioning Settings
AutoSYS sets up a dimensioning environment so that using the dimensioning commands is made easier. AutoSYS will force all dimensions to a layer (user defined), and controls the format of dimensions using dimension styles. When a new drawing is created AutoSYS generates a set of dimension styles to the standard set up for the client selected. Each time the drawing is edited the styles are investigated to make sure scaling layer, text and colours are still to the defined standard.

Dimension Text Style

AutoSYS uses a single text style name to control the display of text used in dimensions. By default the text style name is DPQ_DIM, however the name used can be defined differently in the text initialisation file. The format of the text style used for dimensions (and all text styles created by AutoSYS) is controlled by settings in the system initialisation file. The text style height is set by AutoSYS to zero. This is necessary to control the height of

106

Chapter 10

DIMENSIONS

text in dimensions at different scales. For more information on changing the text style settings used for dimensioning see the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide.

Dimension Layer
AutoSYS has a default layer for dimensions, DPQ_DIM. The layer name can be customised, see the section on layer customisation in the AutoSYS Installation and customisation Guide. Model Space In model space all dimensions are created on the default dimension layer. Whenever a dimension command is used the AutoSYS dimension layer is set prior to the dimension being created, then after the dimension the current layer prior to the dimension command is restored. Paper Space Floating Viewports AutoSYS controls dimension layers in floating viewports by creating a unique layer for dimensions in each floating viewport, based on the default dimension layer name. This is necessary so dimensions in one floating viewport are not displayed in any of the other floating viewports. AutoSYS achieves this by appending the default layer name with the number of the floating viewport.

Dimension Styles
Dimension styles store the values of dimension variables so the same dimension set-up can be used at any time by restoring the dimension style name. Using dimension styles also means that when associative dimensions are edited using STRETCH or TEDIT the style of the dimension is not changed to the current settings. AutoSYS has three basic dimensions styles. These are:
n n n

DPQ_LINEAR DPQ_LIMITS DPQ_TOLER

The above styles are defined in the dpq.dwg prototype drawing , or created from the settings defined by the Dim Variables in the AutoSYS Preferences dialog box. AutoSYS will use style values already defined in a prototype drawing in preference to styles specified in the client Dimension definition file. It is preferable to not use a prototype drawing and let AutoSYS generate the styles from the client definitions. This makes maintaining a consistent style structure over the network or a number of users easier. By default the above style names are used, however these styles names can be

Dimensioning Settings

107

modified according to individual client preferences. The method for doing this is described in the AutoSYS Customisation Section of this manual. Whenever a new drawing is created, the all dimension styles are created from the setting stored in the particular client definition file, if the style name does not already exist in the drawing file. If the style exists in the drawing, the style will be update for Scale, Text Style and Colour based on the setting contained in the particular client definition. When and existing drawing is edited, AutoSYS interrogates the styles and the style will be update for Scale, Text Style and Colour based on the setting contained in the particular client definition. AutoSYS fully utilises the Parent/Child style structure provided in AutoCAD 2000 as the basic tool for setting the global format structure for all dimensions. Dimension overrides are used on individual dimensions for those parts of a dimension that are particular to the individual dimension. Dimension Variables that are controlled by Overrides are listed below Dimension variables controlled by overrides Dimension Variable DIMSCALE DIMLFAC DIMTP DIMTM DIMDEC DIMTDEC DIMADEC DIMRND DIMSE1 DIMSE2 Function Scaling factor for dimension styles Linear scale factor Upper Tolerance value Lower Tolerance value Decimal places for dimension text Decimal places for tolerance text Decimal places for angular text Dimension text rounding value Suppress first extension line Suppress second extension line DIMSCALE is of particular importance as it controls the scale of the dimension as it appears in the final drawing. AutoSYS sets the value of DIMSCALE for each individual dimension depending on where in the drawing the dimension is placed. The table below describes how the scale is applied based the dimensions location in the drawing.

108

Chapter 10

DIMENSIONS

Dimension Scaling (DIMSCALE) Location in Drawing Paper Space Model space viewports Model Space Viewport Bounding boxes Text Height Scale Factor 1.0 The scale of the viewport The scale of the drawing The scale of the bounding box

Dimension Linear Scaling (DIMLFAC) Location in Drawing Paper Space Paper Space over a viewport Model Space viewport Model Space Viewport Bounding boxes Text Height Scale Factor 1.0 The scale of the viewport 1.0 The scale of the drawing The linear scale of the bounding box

The current setting for Linear scaling (DIMLFAC) and the Drawing scale is shown on the status line.

Working With Dimensions

AutoSYS controls the format of dimensions you create. Each dimension you create using an AutoCAD dimension command will been drawn on the AutoSYS dimension layer. This layer name can be changed, for details on setting the dimension layer see the AutoSYS Installation and customisation Section of this manual. AutoSYS provides a set-up tool to establish the dimensioning environment and a series of editing tools that allow dimensions to be modified after placement. Dimensions are placed using the standard AutoCAD dimensioning commands.

Working With Dimensions

109

These can be accessed from the AutoCAD Dimension toolbar or from the integrated AutoSYS dimensioning toolbar as shown below

Dimension Format
When producing engineering drawings there are three main dimension formats that are required to be used. Normal Dimensions where only the dimension value is stated, Limits, where the upper and lower bounds of a dimensions is specified and Tolerance dimensions where the dimension value and the variation from that value is specified. The AutoSYS dimension set-up dialog is used to select the format, decimal places and tolerance values for dimension placed after exiting the dialog and provides the ability to update existing dimension to the parameters established in the dialog

109

110

Chapter 10

DIMENSIONS

To set dimension format 1 Start the DPQ_DIMDIALOG command by selecting

2000 [T3-K29]

From the Dimension menu, choose Dimension Set-up From the Dimension tablet menu area, choose Dialog

2 From the Display Setting area of the AutoSYS Dimension set-up dialog box choose the format required.

Dimension Precision
The number of units (decimal places) which are displayed in dimension text can be controlled using the AutoSYS Dimension set-up dialog box. Only the appropriate setting can be chosen depending on the format setting selected. The number of decimal places are controlled by the variables DIMDEC and DIMTDEC and are applied to the individual dimension as dimoverrrides. To set dimension units (decimal places) 1 Start the DPQ_DIMDIALOG command by selecting
2000 [T3-K29]

From the Dimension menu, choose Dimension Set-up From the Dimension tablet menu area, choose Dialog

2 From the Decimal Places area of the AutoSYS Dimension set-up dialog box choose the units value required.

Limits and Tolerances

The upper and lower values of any limits or tolerance dimension can be controlled using the AutoSYS Dimension set-up dialog box.These values

Working With Dimensions

111

(DIMTP and DIMTM)are applied as dimoverrides on the individual dimension. To set tolerance upper and lower values 1 Start the DPQ_DIMDIALOG command by selecting
2000

From the Dimension menu, choose Dimension Set-up

2 In the Display Setting area choose Tolerance. 3 In the Display Setting area enter the upper tolerance value in the Upper Value edit box. 4 In the Display Setting area enter the lower tolerance value in the Lower Value edit box.

Updating existing dimensions

When you create a dimension, the current dimension style settings are associated with that dimension. The dimension retains this style unless you apply a new one or set up overrides. You can change or update any dimension in the drawing to the new setting created using AutoSYS dimension set-up. This allows you to dimension a drawing to without tolerances and later apply tolerance values to selected dimensions. Updating existing dimension using the Set-up dialog 1 From the AutoSYS Dimension Set-up dialog check the Update dimensions on Exit toggle then hit OK

2 Select the dimensions to update.

111

112

Chapter 10

DIMENSIONS

Updating existing dimensions 1 Start the DPQ_DIMUPDATE command by selecting

2000

From the Dimension menu, choose Update to current,

2 To update to the current dimension setting hit L 3 Select the dimension to update Updating existing dimensions decimal places 1 Start the DPQ_DIMUPDATE command by selecting
2000

From the Dimension menu, choose Update to current

2 To update the number of decimal places type D then L 3 Enter the number of decimal places required then L 4 Select the dimension to update

Prefixes and Suffixes

You can customise dimension text to include a prefix or suffix. To facilitate the use of prefixes and suffixes AutoSYS provides a menu with the more commonly used prefixes and suffixes. To add a prefix or suffix to existing dimension text 1 Start the New Text macro by selecting
2000

From the Dimension toolbar, choose Prefix and Suffix flyout then the prefix or suffix required

2 Select the dimension text to modify. To re-establish the default dimension text 1 Start the New Text macro by selecting
2000

From the Dimension toolbar, choose Prefix Suffix flyout, then Set to Default

2 Select the dimension text to re-establish its default dimension.

Additional Dimensioning Commands

113

Dimension variable toggles

The format of dimension can be update by applying dimension overrides. Some variable are controlled by an On and Off Switch, such as the suppression of the first and second extension lines or the location of text outside the dimension line. AutoSYS provides a simple mechanism to toggle the values off and on by selection the variable tool. If it is on AutoSYS turns it off and visa versa. To toggle dimension variables 1 Toggle Dimension variables by
2000

From the Dimension toolbar, choose Dimension Toggle flyout, then The variable to toggle

The value will be applied as a dimension override to new dimensions as they are placed or to existing dimension that are updated as described earlier

Additional Dimensioning Commands

AutoSYS provides a few additional dimensioning commands to place dimensions and center lines in ways not provided for in standard AutoCAD

Center lining Hole groups

Adding center lines to hole groups 1
2000

Start the DPQ_DIMCEN command by From the Dimension toolbar, choose the Center flyout, then Center Hole Group Select the first circle of the hole group (1) Select the second circle of the hole group (2)

2 3

The center lines are drawn as shown using the value of <DIMCEN x

113

114

Chapter 10

DIMENSIONS

DIMSCALE> as the extension distance of the line past the circle extremities or 1mm whichever is the greater

Circumferential Dimensions
AutoCAD provides tools for linear radial and diameter dimensioning. There are times when circumferential dimensions are required so the DPQ_DIMCIRCUM command has been provided. Adding circumferential dimensions 1
2000

Start the DPQ_DIMCEN command by From the Dimension toolbar, choose the Center flyout, then Circumferential Select the arc to dimension (1) Select the first extension line origin (the first and second extension line must be anticlockwise) (2) Select the second extension origin (3) Select the dimension location (4)

2 3

4 3

11
DRAWING LAYOUT

The drawing sheet is an integral part of any drawing. AutoSYS has a complete set of metric drawing sheets, title blocks, and revision lists. After creating a drawing if the drawing sheet or scale isnt suitable the drawing can be rescaled, changing the drawing sheet, border, and other scaled features. In paper space you can also layout views of your drawing in floating viewports. This chapter covers
n n n n n n n

Adding drawing sheets and title blocks Rescaling the drawing sheet Adding revisions Controlling the drawing sheet visibility Drawing using scaled areas Scaling and aligning floating viewports Adding detail annotations

115

116

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Working with Drawing Sheets

When a new drawing is created a drawing sheet is attached to the drawing according to values selected in the AutoSYS Drawing Set-up dialog box. For information on setting up the drawing sheet see Creating a New Drawing in Chapter 1. The drawing sheet attached to your drawing is effected by the following
n n n n

Paper size Scale Drawing format Client code

Paper Size
AutoSYS is supplied with a set of predefined drawing sheets. These sheets include the ISO standard A0 to A4, B1 and B2. These standard sheets can be used as is, or modified to suit your companys particular drawing sheet requirements. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for details on customising drawing sheets.

Scale
The scale is used to scale up features such as drawing sheets, text, and dimensions created in model space. When a drawing sheet is created in paper space it is inserted without being scaled up.

Drawing Format
The drawing sheet can be attached to the drawing in either model space, or paper space. Model Drawing The drawing is set up in model space and the limits based on the sheet size selected multiplied by the scale factor. The drawing is plotted using the scale factor to reduce the drawing sheet down to the real size of the paper size. Paper/Model The drawing set up in both paper space with the limits scaled to the drawing sheet size at scale 1:1 and in model space the limits based on the sheet size selected multiplied by the scale factor. A floating viewport is created within the border, and a Viewport bounding box is created in model space set at the drawing scale and extending to the limits of the drawing. You draw objects in

Working with Drawing Sheets

117

model space full size. The viewports are scaled independently using the DPQ_ZOOMXP or the DPQ_MVIEW commands. The drawing is plotted at a scale of 1:1 from Paper space. Insert Title Checking this box will insert a title block. If the format chosen was Model Drawing, then the sheet in inserted or Xref'd in Model Space, scaled up by the drawing scale factor. If Paper/Model Drawing was selected then the title will be inserted or Xref'd in Paper Space scaled at 1:1. Leaving the box unchecked means a title sheet will not be inserted..

Client Code
The client code defines the set of title blocks and drawing sheets that are used when creating a new drawing. For example you might have an A1 drawing sheet for client A, and another for client B. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for details on creating drawing sheets for different clients.

Drawing Sheet Visibility

When an AutoSYS drawing is created, the drawing sheet by default is not visible. This has been done so the overhead of the sheet is minimal while moving around your drawing, and if for any reason drawing regeneration is required you dont have to wait for the sheet to be displayed. If however your sheet is not complicated, i.e. it doesnt have a lot of solid fill, or use complex text fonts you may have the sheet displayed all the time. For details on keeping your sheet visible see the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide

drawing area guideline drawing sheet invisible

drawing sheet visible

118

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

To turn on the visibility of the drawing sheet

n

Start the DPQ_SHEETON command by selecting

2000

Drawing sheets toolbar choose Title Visible

As the drawing sheet is usually turned on just prior to plotting the drawing, floating viewport borders are turned off when the drawing sheet is displayed, ready for plotting. To turn off the visibility of the drawing sheet
n

Start the DPQ_SHEETOFF command by selecting

2000

Drawing sheets toolbar choose Title Invisible

Rescaling a Drawing
If you find that the drawing sheet or scale specified when you created your drawing does not suit the objects you have drawn, the scale and, or sheet size may need to change to accommodate your drawing within the drawing sheet. AutoSYS provides a method of changing the entire drawing Set-up. The DPQ_RESCALE command is essentially the same as the function used to Set-up a new drawing. Scale, sheet size, text font, drawing format as well as every other aspect of the drawing Set-up can be changed at any time. The rescale function does not rescale text or blocks inserted at scale. These objects if present in model space will have to scaled and repositioned manually, therefore it is better to rescale before placing any text, or blocks.

A1 drawing sheet 1:1 scale factor

A3 drawing sheet 1:2 scale factor

Adding a Title Block

119

To change the drawing sheet and scale of a drawing 1. Start the DPQ_RESCALE command by selecting
2000

From the Drawing sheets toolbar choose Rescale

2. In the Paper Parameters area choose the Scale text box. Enter the new scale for the drawing sheet. 3. In the Paper Parameters area choose the Paper Size popup list. Choose the new drawing sheet size from the list, then hit OK. The current drawing sheet will be replaced by the drawing sheet specified in the dialog box, and scaled according to the scale factor. Text styles and dimension styles are updated. Any dimensions already on the drawing will be rescaled, however only new text will be at the rescaled value. Any existing text in model space will have to be rescaled manually. If a title attribute sheet has been inserted it will be removed and the data read and re applied to the new title attribute sheet

Adding a Title Block

The title block is inserted into your drawing as a block which contains attributes. The title block inserted is dependent on the drawing sheet specified for the drawing, and the client code. Values for each of the attributes are entered in a dialog box. The default title block contains attributes for drawing number, drawing title, client information, drawing author, revision status, etc. Title blocks can be easily changed to suit your title block layout. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for details.

120

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Title block added drawing sheet invisible To add a title block 1. Start the Title sheet macro by selecting
2000 [T2-N1]

From the Drawing sheets toolbar choose Title From the Draw tablet menu area choose Title Sheets

AutoSYS will detect the space that the drawing sheet is in and automatically insert the title block accordingly.

2 Enter details for each field.

Working in Model Space

121

It is not necessary to enter details for scale or date, as these are automatically filled out by AutoSYS. 3. Choose the Next button to page through additional attributes. 4. Choose OK. The values entered for the title block can be modified at any stage. The title sheet is however only inserted once in a drawing. To change values in the title block 1. Start DDATTE command by selecting
2000 [T1-B19]

From the Modify menu choose Attribute, then Edit From the Attribute tablet menu area choose Attedit Single

2. Select the title block by selecting an attribute object that is part of the title block. 3. Modify values in the Edit Attributes dialog box. 4. Choose OK.

Working in Model Space

In AutoCAD, instead of scaling objects as you draw, all objects are drawn full size and all drawing annotations are inserted or drawn by a factor that is the inverse of the intended plot scale. The actual scale is then set when you print the drawing. For example, if you were to draw and dimension a box 2000 x 2000mm on an A3 drawing sheet, you would need to use a scale factor of 1:10 to get it to fit within the sheet dimensions. This is achieved by scaling up the drawing sheet 10 times so the box, drawn full size, will fit onto the drawing sheet. The inverse of the scale factor used to set up a drawing sheet, in this case 10, is used to scale up those items that are not normally subject to scale. i.e. text, arrow heads, drawing sheets, dimension line spacing, etc. AutoSYS automatically scales up these items by the inverse of the scale factor, so when the drawing is plotted, using the scale factor, it is plotted at the real sheet size dimensions. You draw full size, AutoSYS handles the size of all the objects which need to be adjusted.

122

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Working in Paper Space

Creating floating viewports in paper space has many advantages. Usually associated with 3D drawings, floating viewports can also be used effectively in some situations in 2D drawings. One of the advantages of paper space is that you can have many views on the one model, all at different scales if necessary. These views can be thought of as windows (floating viewports) cut through your paper (space) onto your model (space). Each floating viewport can reflect a detail of any rectangular portion of the model, at any scale. This of coarse can be helpful because instead of having a copy of a detail at a different scale in your drawing, you have a view onto the original model. Plainly any changes to be made are only necessary on the model, and additional editing to update a copy of a detail is not needed. A number of techniques need to be understood to effectively use Paper/Model space. Lets cover these now. AutoSYS provides a number of additional functions to enhance AutoCAD's commands for controlling floating viewports, which make using Paper/Model space more manageable. The method or combination of methods you choose to produce your drawing will depend on the job at hand and how your system administrator feels. Whichever method you choose, be assured that AutoSYS will make the job easier. All that is required is to select what you want and AutoSYS will do the scaling and layering necessary to get the correct final result.

Method 1 - True Paper/Model

This format has all Model objects (bridges, beams etc.) are drawn in Model space while all Paper objects (text dimensions and other annotation symbols used to describe the Model object) are drawn in paper space. This method requires ALL annotations to be drawn in paper space (tilemode OFF). However Model objects can be drawn and edited in model space (tilemode turned OFF) through floating viewports or in Model space tilemode turned ON. Advantages
n n

This is how the system was designed to work Paper objects (annotations) are at paper scale whilst model objects are full size Display scaling is controlled by the viewport scale

Working in Paper Space

123

Disadvantages
n

Zooming is not allowed in floating model space viewports as this stuffs up the viewport scaling (r13 only). Dimensions are not physically attached to the model so when editing the model, dimensions do not automatically update. Moving viewports, panning in floating model space viewports or moving the model with tilemode ON, must be done with care as the link between paper objects and the model is not fixed. This can lead to dimensions not lining up with the parts being dimensioned. The viewport linear scale factor must be applied to the dimension style before Dimensioning to correctly scale the dimension text for each viewport scale.

Although there are a few disadvantages in using this method with raw AutoCAD, AutoSYS takes care of all of them except that panning must still be done with care. When Zooming in model space viewports, AutoSYS will automatically switch to paper space for the zoom then switch back to model space on completion of the zoom command. Scaling of dimensions is done automatically as AutoSYS knows where the dimension is being placed and applies the correct scale factor.

Method 2 - Paper/Model Several viewports looking at the one model

This format has all Model objects (bridges, beams etc.) drawn in Model space, while all Paper objects (text and annotation symbols used to describe the Model object) are drawn in paper space. Dimensions however are drawn in Model space . As with the previous method, all annotations must be drawn with Tilemode OFF, in Paper space with the exception of dimensions. Dimensions are placed with Tilemode OFF but inside a floating model space viewport. The drawing has several viewports looking at the SAME model drawing but at different scale factors, or viewing direction. Here, more than one viewport is viewing a portion of the same model objects. I.e.. Different orthographic views of the same 3D model. A unique dimension layer must be created for EACH viewport so dimensions from one viewport will not display in any other viewports. As the dimensions are attached to the model and dimensions placed with tilemode OFF in the model space viewport being dimensioned, the scaling for the dimension objects is controlled automatically by the viewport scale factor and the dimension text is not scaled (DIMLFAC=1.0).

124

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Advantages
n

Dimensions are attached to the model. When the model is stretched the dimensions change. Paper objects are paper scale whilst model objects are full size Full scaling is controlled by the viewport scale No viewport linear scale factor need be applied to the dimension style before Dimensioning (DIMLFAC=1.0).

n n n

Disadvantages
n

Zooming not allowed in floating model space viewports as this stuffs up the viewport scaling (r13 only). Moving viewports, panning in floating model space viewports or moving the model with tilemode ON, must be done with care as the link between paper objects and the model is not fixed. This is not so much of a problem as the previous example as dimensions are part of the model and will move with it.

Again, AutoSYS takes care of all the disadvantages except that panning must still be done with care.

Method 3 - Paper/Model Viewports display a unique model space area

This method is ideal for 2D drawings which have each view drawn separately in Model space and viewed in its own floating model space viewport. Therefore no two viewports are looking at the same objects. Once again all Model objects (bridges, beams etc.) are drawn in Model space along with text, dimensions and annotation symbols used to describe the Model object are also drawn in model space. The Title sheet and title labels however are drawn in Paper space. Each section of the drawing in model space is contained in a Viewport bounding box. This AutoSYS object has a viewport and detail scale factor attached to it and when drawing in that space the scaling of Annotations is controlled so as to appear correctly when viewed in a floating model space viewport. With this method ALL drawing is done with tilemode ON. The only thing done with tilemode OFF is the final layout of the viewports within the title sheet and plotting. By having tilemode on and working on the model all zooms and pans can be transparent.

Working with Scaled Areas

125

Advantages
n

All drawing work can be achieved with the use of transparent zoom and pan commands. Dimensioning is fully controlled as model and annotations are in the same space Display scaling is controlled by the viewport scale No viewport linear scale factor need be applied to the dimension style before Dimensioning (DIMLFAC=1.0).

n n

Disadvantages
n

It is not how the system was designed to work and later versions of AutoCAD may require modification. Difficult to work with if not using AutoSYS.

Working with Scaled Areas

Areas of uniform (annotation) scale in your drawing can be defined in AutoSYS using Model space viewport bounding boxes. These are special AutoSYS Objects (polyline rectangles with extended data attached), that enclose an area of the drawing in MODEL space that will be displayed in a floating Viewport at a particular scale setting. A viewport bounding box is a link between views of objects in Model space with tilemode ON and Floating Viewports displayed with tilemode OFF. The scale setting attached to the Bounding Box, is the scale at which annotations are scaled when placed in the Viewport bounding box. Not only does the viewport bounding box retain the annotation scale of the area it also stores enlargement scale and units information related o the area as well. The enlargement scale is the scale which the objects enclosed by the Viewport Bounding Box has been either enlarged or reduced. This allows scaled up details to be created where AutoSYS can maintain the linear scale of dimensions (DIMLFAC) to be maintained for the enlarged detail. The Units setting allows mixed units to be used in one drawing. Therefore or one part of the drawing can be 1 Drawing unit = 1 Meter and another part be defined as 1 drawing unit = 1 millimetre or 1 inch etc. At any time during the drawing process a Viewport bounding box will be marked as ACTIVE. If there are no viewport bounding boxes then the current drawing scale is used as the Annotation scale. When placing annotations AutoSYS will scale the object based on either
n

The scale of the Viewport Bounding box the object is placed in if Tilemode is ON and the drawing is in AutoSYS PAPER/MODEL format.

126

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

The scale of the active floating model space viewport if Tilemode is OFF and the drawing is in AutoSYS PAPER/MODEL format. 1:1 if Tilemode is OFF and you are in Paper Space and the drawing is in AutoSYS PAPER/MODEL format. The scale of the drawing if Tilemode is ON and the drawing is in AutoSYS MODEL format.

For all annotations except Dimensions, AutoSYS will automatically sense the location and scale the objects accordingly. Dimensioning, however, is handled differently, due to the way AutoCAD places dimensions either by selecting points or selecting objects. If working with Tilemode ON and you are in a PAPER/MODEL format drawing, an ACTIVE viewport must be set before placing Dimensions. Dimensioning must be performed in the ACTIVE viewport bounding box. If no active viewport is set then the drawing scale will be used by default. If working with Tilemode OFF and Dimensioning in either Paper or model space the dimension scale is handled automatically by the scale of the current floating viewport or the Paper scale, the active viewport bounding box is ignored. Viewport Bounding box functions are accessed from the Model Space Viewport toolbar, as shown below.

To create a Viewport Bounding Box (Scaled Area) 1. Start DPQ_MSVPCREATE command by selecting
2000

From the Model Space Viewport Toolbar choose Create Viewport Bounding Box

2. Select the first corner of the scaled area

Working with Scaled Areas

127

3. Select the other corner of the scaled area

4. Enter the scale for this area in the Scale edit box. 5. If the objects inside the area are drawn full size leave the Enlargement scale at 1.0 if the objects have been scaled up for an enlarged detail then enter the enlargement scale. 6. The Units setting must be set to the units that the objects are drawn. If the objects are drawn in Millimetres select Millimetres if in Meters then Select Meters etc. 7. Choose OK. A conformation dialog will be displayed to indicate the settings defined for the Bounding Box.

128

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Now that the area has been defined, AutoSYS will place annotations (Text scaled Blocks etc.) in this area at the appropriate scale. For Dimensions to be set to the areas scale the viewport bounding box will have to be made active. To Rescale an existing Viewport Bounding Box 1. Start DPQ_MSVPRESCALE command by selecting
2000

From the Model Space Viewport Toolbar choose Rescale Viewport Bounding Box

2. Select the bounding box to be rescaled 3. Select the other corner of the scaled area 4. Make the changes in the dialog box displayed. 5. Choose OK. A conformation dialog will be displayed to indicate the setting defined for the Bounding Box. To display Viewport Bounding Box details 1. Start DPQ_MSVPGETDATA command by selecting
2000

From the Model Space Viewport Toolbar choose Display Viewport Bounding Box Data

A conformation dialog will be displayed to indicate the setting defined for the Bounding Box. To make a Viewport Bounding Box Active 1. Start DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT command by selecting
2000

From the Model Space Viewport Toolbar choose Set current Viewport Bounding Box

2. Select a point inside the viewport bounding box you wish to make current. A conformation dialog will be displayed showing the settings defined for the selected Bounding Box. The box will also be highlighted.

Creating Floating Viewports

129

To highlight the current Active Viewport Bounding Box 1. Start DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT command by selecting
2000

From the Model Space Viewport Toolbar choose Highlight current Viewport Bounding Box

The Active Viewport Bounding Box will be highlighted.

Creating Floating Viewports

Viewport manipulation is controlled through the Viewport Utilities Toolbar and the Model Space Viewport Toolbar

AutoSYS provides a number of tools to enable you to easily create edit and rescale Floating Viewports. Two new commands DPQ_ORTHOVIEWPORT and DPQ_MVIEW have been added to create new floating viewport and viewport sets. Once viewports have been created, AutoSYS provides additional tools to scale, align and set visibility for individual viewports in Paper space.

130

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Creating a Viewport from a Scaled Area

DPQ_MVIEW creates one new viewport based on a Viewport Bounding box already created in Model space. This command automatically sets the viewport size and scaling from information extracted from the Model Space Viewport bounding box. To create a viewport from a Viewport Bounding Box 1. Start the DPQ_MVIEW Command by selecting
2000

From the Viewport Utilities Toolbar choose Create View Port

2. Select a corner for the new viewport 3. Select the other corner for the viewport The size for the viewport is not important as it will be changed to suit the area defined by the selected viewport bounding box. After selecting the viewport position in Paper Space, the new viewport will zoom out so you can see all viewport bounding boxes. 4. You will be asked if you want to show ISOMETRIC Choose No if all bounding boxes are on the WCS. Choose Yes if viewport bounding boxes are not all on the same UCS, this makes it easier to identify the correct box for the new viewport. 5. Select a point inside the correct bounding box, or if this is not possible hit enter and then select the actual bounding box. 6. Choose Yes if the orientation is correct or choose No to cycle until the correct orientation is found then choose Yes.

Creating an Orthographic Viewport Set

DPQ_OTHOVIEWPORT creates four viewports Set-up to display orthographic views of your model. Pre-set 3D viewpoints are used to display elevation, end elevation, plan and ISO views of the model.

Creating Floating Viewports

131

To create four orthographic floating viewports 1. Start the DPQ_ORTHOVIEWPORT Command by selecting
2000

From the Viewport Utilities Toolbar choose Create Orthographic Set

2. Specify the corners of the area to contain the four floating viewports (1,2). 2

1 model space orthographic views of model in paper space floating viewports

Depending on the position of the model it may or may not be displayed in the viewports created. To display the model in each viewport use the DPQ_ZOOMALL command.

Zoom All Floating Viewports

You can zoom all on several floating viewports in one operation using AutoSYSs DPQ_ZOOMALL command. If you are about to scale, or align viewports this command will display the entire model in selected viewports. To zoom all in floating viewports 1. Start the DPQ_ZOOMALL command by selecting
2000 [T3-P23]

From the Viewport Utilities Toolbar choose Zoom, then All From the Display tablet menu area choose All

2. Enter n to zoom all on multiple viewports. 3. Select the viewports to zoom all.

132

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Controlling Scale in a Floating Viewport

A drawing Set-up to use paper space normally gets plotted at a scale factor of 1:1. That is, what is displayed in paper space is plotted full size to your plotter or printer. Since a drawing sheet in paper space is plotted 1:1 then it will be required to apply scale to the floating viewports so the model (drawn 1:1) will fit within the drawing sheet at the correct scale. Scaling floating viewports is achieved using zoom scale factors for each viewport.

viewports with different scales To scale floating viewports 1. Start the DPQ_ZOOMXP command by selecting
2000 [T3-Q22]

From the Viewport Utilities Toolbar choose Zoom, then XP From the Display tablet menu area choose XP

Creating Floating Viewports

133

2. Enter a value for the scale of the viewports. e.g. 2 A value greater than 1 makes the objects in the viewport appear smaller, while a value less than 1 makes the objects appear larger. 3. Enter n to scale multiple floating viewports. (press to scale the current viewport only) 4. Select the borders of the viewports to scale. 5. For each viewport selected, select a point on the objects in the viewport to be at the centre of the viewport when it is scaled.

Aligning Objects in Floating Viewports

Objects seen in one floating viewport can be align vertically or horizontally with objects seen in another viewport.

current viewport 1 2

floating viewports horizontally To horizontally align objects seen in different floating viewports 1. Switch to floating model space. 2. Make one of the viewports you want to align horizontally the current viewport. 3. Start the DPQ_VPALIGN command by selecting
2000

From the Viewport Utilities Toolbar choose Vports Align

4. Enter h for horizontal.

133

134

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

5. Select the alignment point using an object snap if necessary (1).

6. Select the border of the viewport with the view you want aligned (2). 5 Select the alignment point, or if it is the same point as specified in the previous viewport, press L. 2

current viewport 1

floating viewports vertically aligned To vertically align objects seen in different floating viewports 1. Switch to floating model space. 2. Make one of the viewports you want to align vertically the current viewport.

Creating Floating Viewports

135

3. Start the DPQ_VPALIGN command by selecting

2000

From the Viewport Utilities Toolbar choose Vports Align

4. Enter v for vertical, or press L. 5. Select the alignment point using an object snap if necessary (1). 6. Select the border of the viewport with the view you want aligned (2). 7. Select the alignment point, or if it is the same point as specified in the previous viewport, press L.

135

136

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

Adding Revisions
Changes made to your drawing may be indicated and recorded on the drawing and each new issue of the drawing is identified by the revision status in the title block. Any changes made to the drawing are entered in the revision table. Identification of the changes on the drawing are indicated using symbols placed in close proximity to the change, and if a large area needs to be flagged as being changed then a revision cloud can also be drawn around the area.

Revision Symbols
AutoSYS uses a triangle containing a number or letter to identify a drawing change. Revision clouds can also be created to signify a large area of change.

To add a revision cloud 1. Start the DPQ_CLOUD command by selecting

2000

From the Drawing Sheets Toolbar choose Rev Cloud

2. Specify the first point for the revision cloud (1). 3. Specify as many points as necessary to surround the objects under revision (2-7). 4. Press L to end specifying points. You must specify the points for the cloud in an anticlockwise direction if the arcs are to be on the outside of the cloud.

Adding Revisions

137

To add a revision symbol 1. Start the revision triangle insertion macro by selecting
2000

From the Draw menu choose Title Sheets, then Triangle

2 Select a point for the revision triangle (1). 1

3. Enter the revision number or letter in the Edit Attribute dialog box. 4. Choose OK.

Revision Table
The details of the revision are listed in the drawing changes table on the drawing. The default drawing changes table has fields for revision, drawing change note, date, and description. These can be modified, along with the position of the table on the drawing, see the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for details. For detailed information see the DPQ_REVISION command in the AutoSYS Command Reference.

137

138

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

To add a revision to the drawing changes table 1. Start the DPQ_REVISION command by selecting
2000 [T2-O1]

From the Draw menu choose Title Sheets, then Revision From the Draw tablet menu area choose Revision

2 In the Description area enter the reason for the change.

3. Choose OK. The revision is added to the drawing changes table on the drawing, automatically positioned after the previous revision. The revision status in the title block is also updated to reflect the current revision. There is no direct link between the revision triangle symbol and its corresponding revision in the drawing changes table. AutoSYS will always revise to the next revision number or letter specified in the drawing changes table.

Drawing Annotations

139

Drawing Annotations
Adding drawing annotations to your drawing makes the interpretation of the drawing clearer. AutoSYS has a number of section and detail symbols which can be used to annotate your drawing. Drawing Annotations can be accessed from the Annotations toolbar as shown below.

Detail Reference and Balloon

An enlarged detail can be referenced to show its location by drawing a circle which encompasses a portion of an overall view, and a detail reference symbol is linked to it. To add a detail reference and balloon 1. Start the Detail symbol macro by selecting
2000

From the Draw menu choose Section Labels, then Details

2. Specify a point at the centre of the detail to reference (1).

139

140

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

3. Specify a point for the radius of the detail balloon (2).

4. Specify a point for the detail reference symbol (3). 5. Enter attribute data.

Section Label
The enlarged detail has to be cross referenced to the detail location, and named. Sections can also be referenced with this symbol.

Drawing Annotations

141

To add a detail title 1. Start the Detail symbol macro by selecting

2000

From the Annotation Toolbar Section Label

2. Specify a point for the detail title (1). 3. In the Edit Attributes dialog box enter values for the detail title.

4. Choose OK.

Section Arrows
Section arrows are used to show the line on which a sectional view cuts through objects. To draw section line 1. Start the DPQ_SECTION command by selecting
2000 [T2-Q3]

From the Draw menu, choose Section Labels, then Sections From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Sections

141

142

Chapter 11

DRAWING LAYOUT

2. Enter the section reference letter, or number. 3. Enter the drawing reference the section can be found on. 4. Specify a point for the first section arrow (including section and drawing references, as entered above) (1). 5. Specify the next vertex of the section line (2). 6. Specify a point either side of the line to indicate the direction of the section arrow (3). 7. Specify the next point along the section line (4). 8. Specify the next point along the section line (5). 9. Press when you have finished specifying the section line. When you have completed specifying the section line, a section arrow is drawn to compliment the first. The section arrows at either end can be customised, for details on changing them see, the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide.

Mark Number Label

Mark number symbols are used to cross reference material list items with the drawn object.

To add a part detail label 1. Start the Mark Number symbol macro by selecting
2000

From the Annotation toolbar choose Mark Number

2. Specify a point. 3. Specify a rotation angle. 4. Enter attribute values for mark number, etc.

12
PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

Once you have completed your drawing it is usually necessary to have some hard copy of it made. This chapter covers
n n n n n

Setting up the printer. Setting up the AutoSYS printer configuration file. Setting up printer pen settings. Plotting a drawing Trouble shooting

143

144

Chapter 12

PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

Plotting Your Drawing

Using a plotter or printer you can create a hard copy print/plot of your drawing. To ensure that each time you want to plot a drawing it is plotted correctly, it is necessary to setup and configure your plotter, and to set up AutoSYS to plot to the printer. AutoSYSs plotting command differs from AutoCADs in that it is specifically setup to plot drawing sheets quickly. Once AutoSYS has been setup to plot your drawing sheets the time required to initiate a plot is minimal.

Steps to Setup AutoSYS Plotting

The four steps to setup the AutoSYS plotting system are 1. Plotter Installation. (.pc3) AutoCAD 2000 supports plot devices using Autodesk Heidi plotter drivers (HDI) or Windows system printer drivers. To find out if your device is supported by an Autodesk HDI plotter driver, see chapter 6, "Supported Plotters" in the AutoCAD Installation Guide. Refer to the documentation for your plot device to check on the availability of a Windows system printer driver. Install your plotter and make sure it is correctly setup and configured to plot from AutoCAD. 2.Create an AutoSYS plotter config file.(.ini) Each plotter must have an AutoSYS configuration file. These files have the same name as the AutoCAD plotter configuration file but with a .INI extension. This file contains the sheet size (obtained from the plotter configuration .pc3 file) and orientation parameters required for AutoSYS to plot the same way every time a plot is initiated. 3. Create plot style table files.(ctb or stb) In Release 14, pen assignments and AutoCAD object colours were combined to determine line weights, linetypes, and the colour of a drawing when it was plotted. AutoCAD 2000 replaces pen assignments with a plot style table file. A plot style table file can use AutoCAD colours to control line weights, colour, colour screening, grayscale, dithering, linetypes, line end and join styles, fill patterns, and pen numbers at plot time. Plot style tables are device independent and are attached at plot time using the Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments) list in the Plot dialog box. AutoSYS uses a naming procedure to identify style tables created for particular clients. So that when a plot is performed, only those styles that relate to a particular client are available for selection.

Steps to Setup AutoSYS Plotting

145

4. AutoSYS Plot Setup Once all the configuration files have been created each sheet size needs to be plotted to make sure the output is correct.

Installing a Printer or Plotter.

AutoCAD 2000 supports plot devices using Autodesk Heidi plotter drivers (HDI) or Windows system printer drivers. To find out if your device is supported by an Autodesk HDI plotter driver, see chapter 6, "Supported Plotters" in the AutoCAD Installation Guide. Refer to the documentation for your plot device to check on the availability of a Windows system printer driver. Installing a printer or plotter 1. From the AutoCAD File menu, choose Plotter Manager. 2. In Plotter Manager, double-click the Add-a-Plotter wizard icon. 3. On the Add Plotter - Introduction page, choose Next. 4. Follow the wizard through to set up your particular printer or plotter. Then choose Next. 5. On the Add Plotter - Plotter Name page, enter a plotter name or choose Next to accept the default name. 6. On the Add Plotter - Finish page, choose Finish. A new plotter configuration file is created in the Plotter Manager folder. To use this configuration, select the plotter configuration file from the Name list on the Plot Device tab in the AutoCAD Plot dialog box, or from the Device name list in the Plotter and paper section of the AutoSYS plot dialog.

Creating an AutoSYS Plotter Configuration File

To enable AutoSYS to send the correct sheet size to the plotter at plot time, AutoSYS needs to know the available sheet sizes for each plotter. This information is contained in the Plotter configuration file created earlier. However, Autodesk in its infinite wisdom, does not provide any means to extract this information from the plotter configuration file. To get around this problem AutoSYS has a plotter configuration file of its own. One AutoSYS configuration file to match one AutoCAD Plotter configuration file. The AutoSYS configuration file is the same name as the plotter configuration file but with a .INI extension. This file contains a list of sheet sizes you want

146

Chapter 12

PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

AutoSYS to send to the plotter as well as orientation and offset parameters for each sheet size. This file is plotter dependant not client dependant. Creating an AutoSYS plotter configuration file. 1. To obtain the list of available sheet sizes for the plotter we run the AutoCAD plot command form the command line. From command line type Command: -PLOT 2. Follow the prompts as described Detailed plot configuration? [Yes/No] <No>: Enter yes Enter a layout name or [?] <Layout1>:Hit Enter Enter an output device name or [?] <Acrobat PDFWriter>: Enter the name of the plotter you wish to link to AutoSYS If you wish to display a list of available plotters Type ? then press enter. Enter paper size or [?] <A4>: Type ? then press enter This will display alist of available media sizes. Enter paper size or [?] <A4>: Hit Escape to cancel the command 3. Hit F2 to display the text screen and swipe the sheet size list and copy it into the clipboard 4. Open Notepad and paste the list into the new document. We will use this list later. Alternatively you could open the INI file created later and paste this list into the [System] section of that file. 5. From the AutoSYS pull down Select AutoSYS->Preferences. 6. In the dialog that is displayed select the newly created plotter from the Plotter section This action will create a new control file for this plotter. However, it will need to be configured to have each sheet size match the sheet sizes in the AutoCAD plotter PC3 file. 7. Select the Config button next to the plotter. This will display the dialog to edit the AutoSYS INI file for the same plotter. Delete redundant sheets 8. Delete any sheets that are not available on your plotter. Eg: If you are setting up an A3 printer, delete the A1 and A2 sheets.

Steps to Setup AutoSYS Plotting

147

Select the sheet to be removed in the sheet list window and then hit the delete button. Add new sheets 9. Add sheets that are available on your plotter but not in the list. Pick the New Button This will clear the sheet list 10.Add a 2 char. identifier code in the box next to the new button This code should match a sheet size code specified in the client drawing sheet file (dpq???SH.INI) Eg A1 A2 A3. This match allows AutoSYS to select the correct sheet size when plotting a full sheet Ie: an A1 to an A1. When the plotted sheet size is selected for example A1, if the current drawing is A1 then AutoSYS will plot to the drawing scale. IF the plot sheet size is different AutoSYS will plot the current drawing to FIT the plotted sheet size. 11.Add the correct sheet size in the sheet size box. The sheets sizes specified here must match exactly the sheet sizes specified in the PC3 file. The sheet name is case sensitive and spaces are important. The safest way to get the size correct is to cut the size from the Notepad file created earlier (with out the inverted commas). 12.Select the correct orientation and plot offsets for the particular sheet size. 13.Hit Update 14.Repeat steps 9 to 12 for all additional sheet sizes. 15.When finished hit the save button on the Plotter Parameters dialog Then the Cancel button on the AutoSYS Preferences button.

Plot style table file.

AutoCAD 2000 replaces pen assignments with a plot style table file. A plot style table file can use AutoCAD colours to control line weights, colour, colour screening, grayscale, dithering, linetypes, line end and join styles, fill patterns, and pen numbers at plot time. Plot style tables are device independent and are attached at plot time using the Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments) list in the Plot dialog box. Plot style table files are independent of the plotter. Multiple .plot style table files can be created to control the plot format from one plot to another. Each client defined in AutoSYS can have multiple .plot style

148

Chapter 12

PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

table files which AutoSYS can be configured to use. The files are associated with each client simply by the naming according to the rules layed out next Naming convention for plot style table files. For AutoSYS to use the correct plot style table file for individual clients it is necessary to name the files using the following structure. dpq[client code][Identifier string].ctb for COLOUR dependant files dpq[client code][Identifier string].stb for STYLE dependant files Example: dpqstd01.ctb
n

Client Code. The client code is a three character code designed to group client setup parameters. The code is used to specify drawing sheets, layers, system variables, and text. When you create a new drawing you specify the client code to use.

Identifier string. The Identifier string is any number or text description used to uniquely identify a particular style table file from another in the same client set.

To create a plot style table file 1. From the file pull down Plot style Manager then launch the Plot Style Table wizard from the Program folder that is displayed. 2. On the Plot Style Table wizard - Begin page, choose Start from Scratch. 3. On the Plot Style Table wizard - File Name page, enter a file name (using the naming convention described earlier) for the new plot style table. 4. On the Plot Style Table wizard - Finish page, choose Plot Style Table Editor. 5. In the Plot Style Editor, set the plotting properties for AutoCAD colours. 6. In the Plot Style Editor, choose Save & Close to save your changes. 7. On the Plot Style Table wizard - Finish page, choose Finish. The new plot style table you just created is now ready to be attached to your drawing and ready for plotting.

Steps to Setup AutoSYS Plotting

149

AutoSYS Plotting. Getting The Correct Result

All the parameters are now in place. All that we need to do now is to check that the parameters will give us the correct plots on all drawing sheets and reduction levels. You will use standard AutoCAD plotting to obtain the following values for each AutoSYS client drawing sheet.
n n n

Plot sheet size Orientation Origin Offset

The corrected settings will then be transposed into the AutoSYS plotter configuration file and a final trial plot done using AutoSYS plotting to confirm the changes To adjust the final output 1. Begin a new drawing and set it up for one of the sheet sizes at a scale of 1:1. 2. Start the AutoCAD plot command by typing PLOT at the command line or selecting the AutoCAD plot icon form the Standard Toolbar 3. Select the Plot Device tab. 4. Select the new plotter and the Plot style table from this dialog. 5. Select the Plot Settings tab. 6. From this dialog set the paper size to match the drawing sheet size, and set the scale to 1:1. 7. Set the Plot area to Limits. 8. Do a full preview by selecting the Full preview button. 9. Adjust the Sheet size, Origin offsets and the Drawing orientation until the preview looks right. 10.Make a note of the Paper size, Drawing orientation and Origin offset.

150

Chapter 12

PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

11.Start the DPQ_PLOT command by selecting.

2000 [T1-E20]

From the Standard Toolbar choose AutoSYS Plot From the Plot tablet menu area, choose Plot

12.From the Plotter area choose Config.

13.Adjust the Sheet Size, Plot Rotation and Origin offsets to match those values noted down in step 10. 14.Choose Update to save the values.

Plotting the Drawing Sheet

151

15.Choose Save. 16.From the AutoSYS plot dialog that is now visible select OK. This will run the plot

17.Confirm the plot is ok if not repeat steps 13 to 16 until it is. 18.Repeat steps 2 to 17 for all sheet sizes.

Plotting the Drawing Sheet

Drawings setup in paper or model space will be automatically recognised by AutoSYS, and plotted according to the space the drawing sheet is setup in. Before you plot
n n

Make sure the printer or plotter is ready to receive data The plotter data cable is connected, and AutoSYS is configured to send data to the correct output port. If you cant plot using AutoCADs PLOT command you wont be able to plot from AutoSYS.

152

Chapter 12

PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

To plot a drawing sheet 1 Start the DPQ_PLOT command by selecting.

2000 [T1-E20]

From the Standard Toolbar choose AutoSYS Plot From the Plot tablet menu area, choose Plot

2 From the Plotter area select the plotter from the pop up list. 3 From the Output area toggle Use scale on. 4 From the Output area toggle Border on. 5 From the Plot Type area select the PCP configuration to use from the pop up list. 6 Choose OK.

Plotting the Drawing Sheet

153

To plot a drawing sheet on a different sheet size 1 Start the DPQ_PLOT command by selecting.
2000 [T1-E20]

From the Standard Toolbar choose AutoSYS Plot From the Plot tablet menu area, choose Plot

2 From the Output area toggle Use Scale off. 3 From the Output area select a different sheet size from the Sheet plot to pop up list. 4 Choose OK.

153

154

Chapter 12

PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

Trouble Shooting
A lot of factors influence how your drawing sheet is plotted. Different printers and plotters have features which can cause your drawing to be plotted differently. It can often take some time to get the drawing sheet plotted in the correct position on the paper. If the effort is made to get it right, any time you want to plot a drawing sheet all the plot settings are automatic and there will be less likely hood of error. If you run into problems with plots clipping, the following settings should be checked
n n n

Origin Rotation angle Size of drawing sheet compared to maximum plot area of paper being plotted onto. Size and orientation of sheet sizes in the AutoSYS Plotter Parameters dialog box.

An easy method of seeing the result of different setting changes is to make modifications in the AutoCAD Plot dialog box, and view a full preview.

Trouble Shooting

155

Blank Page

155

13
BATCH PROCESSORS

You can have AutoSYS automatically plot, modify drawings, and generate an icon menu on any number of specified drawings. This chapter covers
n n n

Batch plotting Creating Symbol libraries Batch modifying drawing files

157

158

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

Batch Operations
Batch operations are tasks that you set the computer to do by itself and go away to do something else (like sleep!), while it gets on with them. This is a great way to get the computer to pay for its keep. Theres nothing like having a slave that you get to work all night for you without pay! Just be sure to have a good power filter to guard against your slave getting killed by an overnight thunderbolt, especially if you are in the tropics like we are. AutoSYS provides systems for doing batch operations involving plotting, drawing alterations and Symbol libraries generation. All these operations can be run overnight to save time.

Batch Plotting
Batch plotting is the process of specifying a number of drawings which will be plotted sequentially. The batch plotting function uses the AutoSYS plot command, so it is necessary to have the AutoSYS plotting functioning before attempting to run a batch plot. See Chapter 10 Plotting on setting up AutoSYS plotting. Batch plotting will not work from an UNNAMED drawing. To plot multiple drawings 1 Start the Batch Run macro by selecting
2000

From the Enhanced Toolbar choose Batch Run

Batch Plotting

159

2 Choose Plot Drawings.

3 Choose Directory to change the drawings directory.

4 In the Directories list box select the drawings directory. 5 In the File Name list box select any .dwg file name. To set the directory a drawing file must be selected. The file selected does not have to be one of the files you want to plot.

160

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

6 Choose OK.

7 In the Files list box select the drawing files you want to batch plot. Choosing Select All selects all the drawing files to be plotted. Clear All deselects all currently selected files. You can deselect a selected file by selecting it again. 8 Choose OK.

9 From the Plotter area choose a plotter.

Batch Plotting

161

10 From the Output area choose Use Scale to toggle between using the actual drawing sheet size, or to select a different sheet size. If Use Scale is off each drawing plotted will be plotted using the Sheet Plot To size selected in the popup list box. 11 From the Plot Type area choose a PCP to plot all the drawings with. Only one PCP definition will be used to plot all the selected drawings, even if you have selected drawings which have different client codes. 12 Choose OK. AutoSYS will now load each drawing selected and plot it. When the batch is complete the drawing you started the batch run from will be reloaded, unless you have toggled the Exit AutoCAD When Done to on in the AutoSYS Batch Processor dialog box, in which case AutoCAD will be closed. A dialog box indicating that the process has been completed will be displayed Choose OK.

162

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

Creating Symbol Libraries

The AutoSYS symbol library generator creates a Symbol library of wblocks selected. You can then insert the wblock from the DPQ_LIBRARY command. To create an icon menu 1 Start Batch Run by selecting
2000

From the Enhanced Toolbar choose Batch Run or Library Manager

Batch Run will display the dialog above. Library Manager will go straight to the Library Manager dialog shown on the next page.

Creating Symbol Libraries

163

2 Choose Icon Generation.

3 Choose the Clear to add button This will clear the Library title and library edit boxes 4 Enter the name of the new library title. Any descriptive title will do. This is the title used in DPQ_LIBRARY. 5 Enter the name of the library. This is the new library file name (.lib). Insertion parameters will be written to this file for each block. This file and the Slide file (.slb) will be placed in the directory specified by Library path. 6 From the Library Parameters Section, Choose the slide and library options you require. 7 Choose Create The file selection dialog, shown earlier in this chapter will be displayed

164

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

8 Choose the directory containing the block files you wish to be in your new library 9 Choose the files 10 Choose OK Each file selected will be brought up and a slide made and added to the slide library name specified. This file will be placed in the directory specified in Library directory. The file location and insertion parameters will be added to the library file which will also be placed in the directory specified in Library directory. If either of the files exist then the blocks selected and the slides created will be either added to the existing files or the existing entries will be updated to reflect the new settings. The new library title will be added to the list of libraries stored in the AutoSYS system file, autosys.ini A dialog box indicating that the process has been completed will be displayed Choose OK. To Insert Blocks from a Symbol library 1 Start the Insert block from the Symbol libraries macro by selecting
2000

From the Enhanced Toolbar Choose AutoSYS Library

At the command prompt, enter dpq_library

2 Select the library you wish to display then select OK

An Icon Menu of the library will be displayed

Creating Symbol Libraries

165

If the Zoom box is checked selecting an Image will display an enlarged view 3 Select the scaling method If the block is to come into the drawing and have the layers in the block match the current client layer system then check the Insert to Client box. For this to operate correctly the block must have been created in the default client system and a layer mapping file set up to handle the layer mapping changes. For details on how to do this refer to Part 4 Customisation 4 Select the block then select OK 5 Pick and Insertion point: 6 Indicate or type a Rotation angle Note. Each time you create a Symbol library a .lib and .slb file are created in the directory specified in the autosys.ini file for library files and displayed in the DPQ_LIBMANAGER dialog

166

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

User Defined Processors

You can run a script file which modifies or runs some process on a number of drawing files. Examples of processing multiple files might be to
n n n n n n

create DXF files Import DXF files insert a block redefining a block extracting drawing times extracting attribute data

You will have to create a script file which will do the task you require prior to running the user defined batch process. You should thoroughly test the scripts function in a drawing to make sure it works correctly before letting it loose on a number of files. AutoSYS has example script files which are used for various batch tasks. The dpquser1.scr file has a function which when run writes the title block and total time spent in a drawing to a file in comma delimited file format. The file dwgtitle.cdf is created in the directory the drawing files are selected from, and will contain drawing title information found in the title block, and the total time spent in the drawing, for each drawing processed. The file can be used to create a report in either a database or spreadsheet program. To write title block and drawing time data in a cdf format 1 Start the Batch Run macro by selecting
2000

From the Enhanced Toolbar choose Batch Run

2 Choose User Defined. 3 In the User Functions area choose Batch Quit. 4 In the User Functions area select DPQUSER1 from the list box. 5 Toggle Exit AutoCAD When Done to off. 6 Choose OK. 7 In the Files area select files to process.

User Defined Processors

167

8 Choose OK. A dialog box indicating that the process has been completed will be displayed Choose OK.

Script File Format

A script file is text file which contains a set of AutoCAD commands, or lisp commands which execute sequentially. Script files are an easy way of creating a macro which can execute a number of commands at once. The draw back of using script files which execute AutoCAD commands is there can be no user input once the script has started. You must enter the response to each command in the correct order of execution, otherwise the script will stop. AutoSYS requires that the script files used have a specific naming structure. The script file name structure is dpqu[script identifier].scr where the script identifier is any string to describe the function of the script. The script files must be in the AutoSYSs root directory, dpq_app\dpq_v7 by default.

Example Script
You might want to insert a block in a number of drawings which represents a Preliminary Only stamp. The steps to follow to achieve this are
n

Create a Wblock representing the stamp at a scale of 1:1, placed in the position and rotation you want it on a drawing. Make the blocks insertion point 0,0, and give it the name stamp. From the command line execute the INSERT command and write down the response to each prompt. Create the script file and test it in a drawing. Run the User Defined Processor on multiple drawing files.

n n

Script files can be created using any text editor, or using the AutoSYS Editor selected from the AutoSYS Batch Processor dialog box. To create a script file 1 Start the Batch Run macro by selecting
2000

From the Enhanced Toolbar choose Batch Run

168

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

2 Choose User Defined. 3 In the User Functions area select DPQUSER2 from the list box. 4 In the User Functions area choose Edit.

5 Select the top line in the list box. 6 In the text edit box at the bottom of the AutoSYS Editor dialog box enter the description for the script file e.g. ;Insert Preliminary Only stamp block Any line starting with a semi-colon (;) is a remark, and is not executed in the script. If the first line in the script is a remark it is displayed when the script is selected in the AutoSYS Batch Processor dialog box. 7 Choose New. New inserts the contents of the text edit box to the line immediately below the position of the cursor in the list box. 8 Select the top line in the list box. 9 In the text edit box enter insert stamp 0,0 !dpq_scale ss !dpq_scale returns the scale of the drawing as set-up by AutoSYS Spaces and blank lines are interpreted as a in script files. You will need two trailing spaces (indicated above as s), or two blank lines for this script file to function correctly.

User Defined Processors

169

10 Choose New. 11 Delete any additional blank lines. You can test for blank lines by attempting to select a line under the last line you require, if one exists the line will be highlighted. Lines can be edited by selecting the line, editing the text in the edit box, then choose Update. 12 Choose Save. Once the script file has been written it is good practice to test it in the current drawing to see if it works correctly. To run a script file 1 Start the SCRIPT command by entering script. 2 In the Select Script File dialog box choose the script file. If the dialog box is not displayed enter the path and script name. 3 Choose OK. When the script works without error you can use it to do a batch run. To batch run a user script 1 Start the Batch Run macro by selecting
2000

From the Enhanced Toolbar choose Batch Run

170

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

2 Choose User Defined. 3 In the User Functions area choose Batch Save. 4 In the User Functions area select DPQUSER2 from the list box. 5 Toggle Exit AutoCAD When Done to off. 6 Choose OK. 7 Select the drawing files to process. 8 Choose OK. Each drawing selected will be opened, and the script file will be run. The drawing will be saved, and the next drawing opened. To Import DXF files This option allows DXF files to be converted into DWG format. The drawing name will be the same as the original DXF name and the .DWG files will be placed into the same directory and the original DXF files

User Defined Processors

171

1 Start the Batch Run macro by selecting

2000

From the Enhanced Toolbar choose Batch Run

2 Check the DXF Box 3 Choose User Defined. 4 In the User Functions area choose Batch Save. Note! Batch Quit, will import the files but will not save them to DWG. 5 In the User Functions area select DPQUDXF from the list box. This is a special script file which performs a redraw after each files has been imported. Any script file however, can be chosen if some post processing is required after the files have been imported. 6 Toggle Exit AutoCAD When Done to off. 7 Choose OK. 8 Select the drawing files to process only DXF files will be available here. 9 Choose OK.
171

172

Chapter 13

BATCH PROCESSORS

Each DXF file selected will be imported and saved as a DWG file in the same directory.

PART 3

COMMAND REFERENCE

173

Blank page

14
COMMAND REFERENCE

This chapter describes AutoSYS commands in alphabetical order. You can access command by
n n n n

Selecting icons on toolbars Selecting options on menus Entering the command at the command prompt Where applicable, you are referred to additional information in the manual as well as related commands and system variables.

175

Blank Page

DPQ_12DIM13

177

DPQ_12DIM13

Full dimension update in drawings created in r12 Drawings created in Release 12 or earlier, have their dimension text use the current text style and the number of decimal places set to the current value of the AutoCAD system variable luprec. With Release 13 and later these values are stored as dimension variables in the current dimension style. When a r12 drawing comes into r13 or later, AutoCAD leaves the dimension alone, until you update or grip the dimension. At this point, AutoCAD cannot find values for the text and decimal places and assigns 4 decimal places and the text style STANDARD to the dimension. The result is, that some dimensions may appear incorrect. This command interrogates all associative dimensions in a drawing and applies the correct number of decimal places and text style to the dimension. This command is not available from either a toolbar or pulldown
2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_12dim13 See also DPQ_12DIM13STY, DPQ_DIMREBUILD, DPQ_DIMRESET

DPQ_12DIM13STY

Updates dimension text styles in drawings created with r12 This command is similar to DPQ_12DIM13 but only updates the text style. This command is not available from either a toolbar or pulldown

2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_12dim13sty See also DPQ_12DIM13, DPQ_DIMREBUILD, DPQ_DIMRESET

DPQ_AMENDMK

Draws amendment marks When a drawing is revised, the areas that have been modified should be identified with an amendment mark. This command places amendment marks on a drawing

2000

From the Draw toolbar, choose the Drawing Sheet flyout, then

178

DPQ_ARCDIST

At the command prompt, enter dpq_amendmk Amendment Mark: Enter the revision number Select position for amendment mark: Specify insertion points then press enter when finished See also DPQ_REVISION

DPQ_ARCDIST

Measures the distance along an arc Measures the circumferential distance along a selected arc
2000

From the Inquiry toolbar At the command prompt, enter dpq_arcdist Select an Arc : Use an object selection method (1) Pick arc first point or Enter for full arc : Specify a point (2) or enter The first and second points must be chosen in an anti clockwise direction. Full Arc The full circumferential length and angle of the Arc will be calculated. First point The circumferential length is measured between the two points selected on the Arc Pick arc second point: Specify a point (3) You will now be prompted whether to place the calculated distance and angle on the drawing. Place Arc Data on drawing(Y or N) <Yes> : Press Enter or Y for Yes or N for No Yes Places the text on the drawing using the default drawing text height. Text insertion point: Specify a point where the text is to be located Rotation angle : Specify a point to indicate the angle or enter an angle The circumferential distance and angle will be placed on the drawing in the default drawing text size at the location chosen.

DPQ_ASCIIDRAWING

179

No The calculated distance and angle will be displayed in a dialog. See also

DPQ_ASCIIDRAWING

Creates a CDF file of title block information and drawing time The data entered into the title block and the time spent in a drawing can be output into a CDF (comma delimited file). The data is always written to the file dwgtitle.cdf in the same directory as the current drawing. If the file exists the data is appended to the file. The file can be then imported into a spreadsheet, or database program for reports etc. This command is most useful for interrogating multiple drawings with the batch processor. See DPQ_BATCH

2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_asciidrawing See also DPQ_BATCH

DPQ_ATTUPD

Redefines blocks (from a file) retaining attribute values Similar to the AutoCAD ATTREDEF command except that the block in the drawing is selected and updated to a block on file.
2000

From the Attribute toolbar At the command prompt, enter dpq_attupd Select Block you wish to redefine: Use an object selection method AutoSYS will search for a file of the same name as the block chosen. The search path will be the ACAD path then the AutoSYS path. New attributes assigned to existing block references are given their default values. Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. Old values not included in the new block are deleted from the old block reference

180

DPQ_ATTUPD

Blank Page

DPQ_BATCH

181

DPQ_BATCH

Plots, modifies, & generates icon menus for multiple files. The DPQ_BATCH command allows you to plot, modify and create an icon menu for any number of drawing files. Once an operation has been started the process is run on each drawing file specified automatically. For more information, see chapter 11", Batch Processors" DPQ_BATCH has a dialog box with several levels of subdialogs. The documentation presents each area of the main dialog box and directs you to information on common subdialog boxes.
2000

From the Standard toolbar, choose From the File menu, choose Applications, then Batch Run At the Command prompt, enter dpq_batch

Plot Drawings
Plot multiple drawings automatically. AutoSYSs DPQ_PLOT command is used to plot each drawing specified in this process, therefore you must be able to successfully plot using the DPQ_PLOT command before running batch plots. See Plotting Your Drawing in chapter 10, Plotting, in the AutoSYS Users Guide.
Select Files Plotting Setup

Displays the Select Files dialog box described in Select Files on page 184 Displays the AutoSYS Quick Plot dialog box, see DPQ_PLOT command on page 262

182

DPQ_BATCH

Icon Generation
Creates a symbol library of the drawing files selected using the DPQ_LIBMANAGER command. Symbol libraries are a collection of blocks files stored either on your computer or on the network. The DPQ_LIBRARY command displays these collections to be displayed graphically (similar to ICON menus) and then be inserted into the current drawing at the current drawing scale, full size or some user defined scale. For information on how to insert Wblocks using the library created, see DPQ_LIBRARY, DPQ_LIBMANAGER command definitions later in this manual or Creating Symbol Libraries in chapter 11, or Batch Processors, in the AutoSYS Users Guide.

User Defined File List

Allows the user to locate a file list generated externally and bypass the normal file selection dialog. The format of the file list must be the same as would be generated by the internal file selection process. When generating your own lists edit a list created by the internal function to see the format. After hitting OK you will be presented with a file selection dialog. Choose a file (the extension must be .lst). If you cancel this dialog, you will be asked to select a series of files using the normal file selection dialog.

DXF
Allows DXF files to be selected. When the User Defined button is selected and Batch SAVE toggled on, the files will be converted to DWG format. A DPQUDXF script file has been provided to run with this option.

User Defined
You can run a user defined script file which modifies or runs some process on a number of drawing files.

User Functions
Specifies control and the script file for User Defined processes.

DPQ_BATCH

183

Batch Save Batch Quit Script File Name list box

After the process is completed on each drawing, the drawing file will be saved. After the process is completed on each drawing, the drawing file will not saved. Specifies the script file to run for each drawing in the User Defined process. The script files are named dpquser[0-9].scr and should be located in AutoSYSs root directory, \dpq_v7, by default. For more information, see Script File Format in chapter 11, Batch Processors, in the AutoSYS Users Guide. Edits an existing script file. This is a simple line editor which is used inside AutoCAD. For more information, see the DPQ_EDITOR on page 217. You could also edit the script files in your favourite editor, external to AutoCAD. Displays the function of the script file specified in the script file name list box. The description is the first line of the script file prefixed with a semi-colon (;).

Edit

Script File Description

Use Recover
Checking this box will cause the drawings selected to be opened using RECOVER. Leaving this box unchecked cause the drawings selected to be opened using OPEN. This option allows drawings that require recovering to be processed. This box would normally be left unchecked.

Exit AutoCAD When Done

Specifies whether or not you want AutoCAD to be closed on completion of the Batch Processors.

184

DPQ_BATCH

Select Files
Specifies the drawing files to process.

Directory
Specifies the directory to display files from in the Files list box.

For a full description of the Drawing Directory dialog box, see the AutoCAD OPEN command in the AutoCAD Command Reference. You change Directories to the directory you want to choose drawing files from to run the batch processors on. Any drawing file in the File Name list box must be selected to indicated to AutoSYS which directory you want to select files from in the Select Files dialog box.

DPQ_BATCH

185

Files
Displays the drawing files in the directory specified by Directory. Choose the files to run the batch process on. Only files hi-lighted will be processed. To remove a hi-lighted file from the process choose it again.

Select All
Choose this button to select all files in the Files list box, to be processed.

Clear All
Choose this button to deselect all hi-lighted files in the Files list box. See also DPQ_LIBRARY DPQ_LIBMANAGER DPQ_PLOT

186

DPQ_BLOCK

DPQ_BLOCK

Creates blocks and/or wblocks from selected objects From the AutoSYS Draw toolbar select the Block flyout then From the Construct menu, choose AutoSYS Block
[T2-P2]

2000

From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Block New At the Command prompt, enter dpq_block

Internal Block Name

Specifies the block name to be created.
Block

Enter the name of the block to create in the Block text box, or choose the Block button to select a block from the Blocks Defined in this Drawing dialog box, choose Block.

DPQ_BLOCK

187

Pattern View Block Slide Selection

Allows you to search for specific block names. Displays a slide of the selected block, if found. Indicates the selected block name.

Wblock Name
Specifies a name and directory for the creation of a Wblock.
Directory

Specifies the directory to write the Wblock to. Enter a directory, or select a directory from the Select Wblock File Name dialog box, choose Directory. If a directory is not specified, the Wblock will be written to the current directory. Enter the name of the Wblock. Enters the current block name in the Wblock Name edit box.

Wblock Name Wblock=Block

Attributes
Defines block attributes using the AutoCAD DDATTDEF command. Refer to AutoCAD documentation for usage.

Insert Options
Action to be taken after the block has been created.
None Oops Block

After the block has been created none of the objects selected to create the block are returned to the screen. The objects used to create the block are returned to the screen as they were prior to making the block. The block created is returned to the screen.

Make Slide
Specifies optional parameters related to creating slides of blocks when they are remade.
On Show IP

Defines whether or not a slide will be created when the block is created. Indicates the insertion point of the block visually as a point. It is only temporary, and is removed after the slide has been created.

Zooming
Defines the method of zooming around the block to create a slide.
Manual

Manual zoom is similar to ZOOM DYNAMIC except it

188

DPQ_BLOCK

doesnt initially zoom to the generated portion of the drawing. A view box representing the aspect ratio of your current viewport is displayed, and can be reduced or enlarged, or moved around to be positioned centrally over the block, and subsequently zoomed to the view box to make the slide. The pan view box initially appears. Drag it to the desired position and press the pick button. The zoom view box then appears. Moving the cursor resizes the view box about the left hand edge of the view box. Press to perform the zoom, or press the pick button to return to the pan view box.
Auto

Zooms automatically so the block to be made is maximised and centrally located in the current viewport. This method only works on exploded objects, and will not automatically zoom around objects contained within a block.

View Slide
Displays a slide of the Wblock, if found.
On

Defines whether or not slides will be displayed. Create block.

OK

Warning Dialog Box

If the block name to be remade is not changed, or is changed, and a block of the same name already exists, a Warning dialog box will be displayed.

No

Allows the block name to be changed.

Redefine

Existing block will be redefined.

Insertion base point: Specify a point Select objects: Use an object selection method

DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE

189

See also DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE DPQ_BLOCKUPDATE

DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE

Explodes blocks for editing Explodes blocks so they can be edited using AutoSYSs DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE command. Nested blocks will be exploded so the object selected, and every nested block above it, are explode. Nested blocks on the same level as the object selected, and below are not exploded.

2000

From the AutoSYS Draw toolbar select the Block flyout then From the Modify menu, choose Edit Block, then Explode To Edit

[T1-D16]

From the Edit tablet menu, choose Edit At the Command prompt, enter dpq_blockexplode Pick block to explode: Use an object selection method See also DPQ_BLOCK DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE DPQ_BLOCKUPDATE

DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE

Remakes an exploded block A block exploded using the DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE command can be automatically remade, adding or removing selected objects from the original block.

2000

From the AutoSYS Draw toolbar select the Block flyout then From the Modify menu, choose Edit Block, then Remake

[T1-E16]

From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Remake

190

DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_blockremake

Parent Block
Specifies the block name to be remade. If more than one block has been exploded, (using the AutoSYS DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE command) then it will be necessary to select the block name to be remade from the list of parent block names. The parent block name indicates the upper most block name in a nested block.

Child Block
Indicates the names, if any, of nested exploded blocks below the parent block. The last child block name is the block at the lowest level, or nesting which will be remade, and corresponds to the block selected to be exploded using the AutoSYS DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE command. If the block exploded is on the upper most level, (i.e. it is not part of a nested block) then no child block will be displayed.

View Block Slides

Displays slides of the blocks to be remade.
On

Defines whether or not slides will be displayed.

Make Slides
Specifies optional parameters related to creating slides of blocks when they are remade.
On

Defines whether or not slides will be created when the block/blocks are remade.

DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE

191

Show IP

Indicates the insertion point of the remade block visually as a point. It is only temporary, and is removed after the slide has been created.

Zooming
Defines the method of zooming around the remade block to create a slide.
Manual

Manual zoom is similar to ZOOM DYNAMIC except it doesnt initially zoom to the generated portion of the drawing. A view box representing the aspect ratio of your current viewport is displayed, and can be reduced or enlarged, or moved around to be positioned centrally over the block, and subsequently zoomed to the view box to make the slide. The pan view box initially appears. Drag it to the desired position and press the pick button. The zoom view box then appears. Moving the cursor resizes the view box about the left hand edge of the view box. Press to perform the zoom, or press the pick button to return to the pan view box. Zooms automatically so the block to be remade is maximised and centrally located in the current viewport. This method only works on exploded objects, and will not automatically zoom around objects contained within a block.

Auto

OK
Displays the Remake Block dialog box.

192

DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE

Remake Block Dialog Box

Defines block and Wblock names and directory for each level to remake.

Remake Block Name

Specify block name.
Redefine

Indicates the old block name of the level to be remade. Enter a new name, or leave as default value to redefine existing block. Displays a slide of the old block, if made when block was created.

Block Slide

Wblock Name
Specifies parameters to create a Wblock of the block to be remade.
Make Wblock Directory

Specifies if a Wblock will be created of the block to be remade. Specifies the directory to write the Wblock to. Enter a directory, or select a directory from the Select Wblock File Name dialog box, choose Directory. If a directory is not specified, the Wblock will be written to the current directory. Enter the name of the Wblock. The default name is the same name as the block to be remade. Displays a slide of a Wblock of the same name if found.

Redefine Wblock Slide

DPQ_BLOCKUPDATE

193

OK Remake block

Warning Dialog Box

If the block name to be remade is not changed, or is changed, and a block of the same name already exists, a Warning dialog box will be displayed.
No Redefine

Allows the block name to be changed. Existing block will be redefined.

Remove objects: Use an object selection method to remove objects from the block to remake Select objects: Use an object selection method to add objects to the block to remake Block insertion point: Specify a point, or K for insertion point of old block Redefining block LEVEL-3 If the block is nested the Remake Block dialog box is redisplayed for each nested level, however only the first block to be remade can have objects removed or added. See also DPQ_BLOCK DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE DPQ_BLOCKUPDATE

DPQ_BLOCKUPDATE

Updates an internal block with a Wblock definition By selecting an internal block it can be automatically updated with the definition of a Wblock of the same name on your hard drive or network.

2000

From the AutoSYS Draw toolbar select the Block flyout then

194

DPQ_BREAKATLINE

From the Modify menu, choose Edit Block, then Update

[T1-E17]

From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Update At the Command prompt, enter dpq_blockupdate Current Search Directory is > C:\dwgs\blocks search Directory<select Block>: Enter d or use an object selection method to select a block Search Directory Specifies which directory the updated Wblock definition will be found. The Select File dialog box will be displayed. Choose any drawing file in the required directory, then choose OK. At the completion of the command you will be prompted whether you want the drawing to be regenerated to redefine the blocks updated. See also

DPQ_BREAKATLINE

Breaks multiple objects crossing a single line From the Modify toolbar, choose the Break flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_breakatline Select objects (lines, circles or arcs) to break: Use an object selection method Select breaking line : Use an object selection method The first selection set of objects will be broken at the intersection point(s) of each object and the break line. See also DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN DPQ_BREAKCHANGE DPQ_BREAKEND DPQ_BREAKEQUAL DPQ_BREAKINT DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

2000

DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN

195

DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN Breaks a line that passes through two other lines By selecting a line between the boundaries of two lines, the line selected will be broken from the first boundary to the second.
2000 [T1-D6]

From the Modify menu, choose Break, then Break Between From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Between At the Command prompt, enter dpq_breakbetween

X 1

Select line section to remove: Select a line (1) See also DPQ_BREAKATLINE DPQ_BREAKCHANGE DPQ_BREAKEND DPQ_BREAKEQUAL DPQ_BREAKINT DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

DPQ_BREAKCHANGE

Breaks lines at line boundaries & changes the broken line layer This command breaks a series of lines into 2 or 3 parts as it passes over one or two boundary lines, and changes the layer of the line which pass between the boundary lines to another layer.

2000

From the Modify toolbar choose the Break flyout then From the Modify menu, choose Break, then Break Change

[T1-D7]

From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Break Change At the Command prompt, enter dpq_breakchange Line(s) to be broken (Return) when done: Select a line/s (1) First break line: Select a line (2) Second break line: Select a line (3) Layer to change object to <current> : Specify a valid layer name or press If the first and second break lines selected are the same line, then the end portion only of the lines to be broken has the layer changed.

196

DPQ_BREAKEND

See also DPQ_BREAKATLINE DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN DPQ_BREAKEND DPQ_BREAKEQUAL DPQ_BREAKINT DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

DPQ_BREAKEND

Breaks a line from a given point on the line to the end of a line From the Modify toolbar choose the Break flyout then From the Modify menu, choose Break, then To end

2000

[T1-E10]

From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Break To End At the Command prompt, enter dpq_breakend Line to break : Select a line (1) Side to erase : Select a line (2) See also DPQ_BREAKATLINE, DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN, DPQ_BREAKCHANGE, DPQ_BREAKEQUAL, DPQ_BREAKINT, DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

DPQ_BREAKEQUAL

Breaks a line equi-distant from a point selected on a line From the Modify toolbar choose the Break flyout then From the Modify menu, choose Break, then Break Equidist At the Command prompt, enter dpq_breakequal Select line to break : Select a line (1) Total break distance : <15.0> : Specify a distance (2) See also DPQ_BREAKATLINE, DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN, DPQ_BREAKCHANGE, DPQ_BREAKEQUAL, DPQ_BREAKINT, DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

2000

DPQ_BREAKINT

Breaks a line at an intersection point From the Modify toolbar choose the Break flyout then

2000

DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

197

From the Modify menu, choose Break, then At Intersection

[T1-D10]

From the EDIT tablet menu area, choose Break Int At the Command prompt, enter dpq_breakint Select line to break : Select a line Select intersection point : Select intersection See also DPQ_BREAKATLINE DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN DPQ_BREAKCHANGE DPQ_BREAKEND DPQ_BREAKEQUAL DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE Draws a parts break with multiple break symbols This command applies multiple break symbols to an existing line.
2000

From the Modify toolbar choose the Break flyout then At the command prompt, enter dpq_breakmultiple Select line to Break : Use an object selection method. Number of breaks <0> : Enter the number of symbols required. See also DPQ_BREAKATLINE DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN DPQ_BREAKCHANGE DPQ_BREAKEND DPQ_BREAKEQUAL DPQ_BREAKINT

198

DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE

Blank Page

DPQ_CHANGELAYER

199

DPQ_CHANGELAYER

Changes an objects layer to current or an objects layer Changes the layer of objects to the current layer or to another objects layer. 2000 provides the AI_MOLC command to perform this task. This command is included in the AutoSYS command set for upward compatibility for existing users.

2000

From the Object Properties toolbar choose the Enhanced Layer flyout then From the LAYER tablet menu area, choose Change Layer By Selection At the Command prompt, enter dpq_changelayer Select objects: Use an object selection method Select object on desired layer or ENTER for current layer: Use an object selection method or press K See also DPQ_LAYER DPQ_LAYEREXTENDED DPQ_LRS DPQ_LAYERMODE DPQ_LAYERMAKE DPQ_LAYERSET DPQ_LAYEROFF DPQ_LAYERON AI_MALOC MATCHPROP in the AutoCAD User Guide and LMAN LAYMCH LAYCUR LAYISO LAYFRZ LAYOFF LAYLCK LAYULK in BONUS tools

[T1-C29]

DPQ_CIRCLEIMP

Draws circles using English hole sizes At the Command prompt, enter dpq_circleimp Enter Inch hole size <>: Enter the hole size Leave a space between the whole inch and the fraction portion of the hole diameter Centre Point: (or ENTER to Reference from ): Specify a point The English (inch) hole size specified will be converted to millimetres and a circle of that diameter drawn. See also CIRCLE

2000

200

DPQ_CLEARSYS

DPQ_CLEARSYS

Deletes the AutoSYS drawing setup data from the drawing At the command prompt, enter dpq_clearsys

2000

DPQ_CLIENT

Generates and modifies client definitions At the command prompt, enter dpq_client

2000

The dialog above will be displayed showing a subset of the client definition information. This information is generally enough to define a basic client for layer linetype text and dimension format. More intense client definitions can be created using the AutoSYS Preferences command Each section of the dialog will now be explained.

DPQ_CLIENT

201

Drawing Sheets
In this section the names and insertion format for the title sheets is configured. Title Block Enter the block name of the Title block. The AutoSYS search path will be used to locate the block file.
Title Labels

Enter the block name of the Title labels block. The AutoSYS search path will be used to locate the block file. If Checked then the Title block will be Xrefd if not checked it will be inserted. If Checked then the Title labels (attributes) are part of the Title block and the title block will be inserted not Xrefd

Xref

Com

Layer Definitions
This section allow layers and colors to be mapped to the basic line styles required for AS1100. The Line descriptions come directly from AS1100. Layer Name Defines the name of the layer you wish to be mapped for each line style.
Pen Color

Defines the pen thickness for each line style. Defines the layer color for each line style. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog. Defines the linetype for each line style. Defines the file that contains the linetype settings.

Linetype File

Text
This section defines text parameters. Layer Paper Defines the layer name for text generated in Paper Space.
Style Paper

Defines the style name for text generated in Paper Space. If Dynamic text is chosen in the Text Font section, this name will be the same for all text heights. If Fixed is chosen then a different style should be defined for each height. These styles will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled Defines the layer color for text generated in Paper Space. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog.

Color Paper

202

DPQ_CLIENT

Layer Model

Defines the layer name for text generated in Model Space and Model space view ports. Defines the style name for text generated in Model Space. If Dynamic text is chosen in the Text Font section, this name will be the same for all text heights. If Fixed is chosen then a different style should be defined for each height. These styles will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled. Defines the layer color for text generated in Model Space and Model space view ports. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog.

Style Model

Color Model

Dimensions
This section defines basic Dimensioning parameters. Layer Name Defines the layer name for dimensions.
Text Style

Defines the text style for Dimension text. This style must be a 0 height style. This style will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled Defines the color for the Dimension Lines. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog. Defines the color for the Dimension Extension Lines. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog. Defines the color for the Dimension Text. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog.

Dimension color

Extension color

Text color

Text Font
This section defines the font and text format. Font Edit Box Displays the text font to be used for Text and Dimension Text styles defined in the previous sections. These styles will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled
Width Factor Height Type

Defines the width factor to apply to text styles. Defines the text styles format. Dynamic will create 0 height fonts. Fixed will create fixed height fonts for each text height defined.

DPQ_CLOUD

203

Browse

Displays a file selection dialog to locate font files. The chosen file will be displayed in the Font edit box.

General
Saving and Cancelling the Dialog Cancel Closes the dialog box. If changes have been made to any preferences they wont be saved.
OK

Saves all values and Closes the dialog box

Please note, that quick client will always set Layerdirectmap to On See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_CLOUD

Draws revision clouds From the Draw menu, choose Title Sheets, then Rev Cloud At the Command prompt, enter dpq_cloud First point : Specify a point (1) Next point : Specify a point (2-5) Specify points of the cloud in an anticlockwise direction. The cloud will be placed on the layer specified in the [Object Layer] section of the client layer definition file dpq???la.ini Location of Text/Symbol or Enter for none Select a point if text, a note or a block is to be inserted or hit enter if none is required If a point is selected you will be prompted Amendment Mark/Block/Note Select the type of insert required
Mark

2000

Amendment Mark No Enter the mark number for the revision

Block

The block specified in the [Object Parameters] Amendmentblock section of the client system definition file dpq???sy.ini will be inserted at the specified point
Note

Amendment Mote Enter the notes

204

DPQ_COPYROTATE

See also Express tools in 2000

DPQ_COPYROTATE

Copy and rotate objects From the Draw toolbar choose From the Construct menu, choose Copy Rotate

2000

[T1-E5]

From the EDIT tablet menu area, choose Copy Rotate At the Command prompt, enter dpq_copyrotate Select objects: Use an object selection method Select base/pivot point : (or ENTER to Reference from): Specify a point(1) Select second pivot point :(or R to Reference from): Specify a point (2) Rotation angle :<30.0> : Specify an angle See also DPQ_MOVEROTATE and Express tools in 2000

DPQ_CURVELEADER

Draws curved leader lines Draws simple Arc curved leader lines with an arrow head

2000

From the Draw toolbar, choose the Annotate flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_curveleader Arrow Start point: Specify a point (1) Next Point (or R to Reference from ): Specify a point (2)

DPQ_CURVELEADER

205

Degree of Curve end : Specify a point to obtain desired curve (3)

The size of the arrow is controlled by the value of Curveleaderarrow in the Object Parameters section of the Client system definition file. See page 42 of the Installation and customisation guide.

206

DPQ_CURVELEADER

Blank Page

DPQ_DDATTE

207

DPQ_DDATTE

DDATTE command with multiple object selection From the Modify menu, choose Edit Attributes, then Multiple From the Attributes tablet menu area, choose Multiple At the Command prompt, enter dpq_ddatte Standard AutoCAD DDATTE command prompting for multiple object selection, refer to AutoCAD documentation for usage. See also

2000 [T1-A19]

DPQ_DDEDIT

DDEDIT command with multiple object selection From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then Multiple From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Edit At the Command prompt, enter dpq_ddedit Standard AutoCAD DDEDIT command prompting for multiple object selection, refer to AutoCAD documentation for usage. See also

2000 [T1-M2]

DPQ_DDMODIFY

DDMODIFY command with multiple object selection From the Modify menu, choose Change, then object From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Change Properties At the Command prompt, enter dpq_ddmodify Standard AutoCAD DDMODIFY command prompting for multiple object selection, refer to AutoCAD documentation for usage.

2000 [T1-D12]

208

DPQ_DETAIL

DPQ_DETAIL

Draws a detail reference and a balloon From the Draw menu, choose Section Labels, then Details At the Command prompt, enter dpq_detail Centre point of items to be detailed : Specify a point (1) Radius for the detail circle : Specify a point (2) Reference balloon location : Specify a point (3) Detail no. : <A> : Specify a detail mark Enter reference letter : <-> : Specify a reference letter See also

2000

DPQ_DETAILSCALE

Generates scaled details From the Draw toolbar, choose the Annotate flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_detailscale Select detail circle or enter to create one: Select a circle or Use an object selection method to select an existing circle (1) or press enter to draw one. Enter Select center point of circle: (or ENTER to Reference from ): Select a point (1) for the center of the circle or enter to apply a relative point Select outer edge of circle: Select a point (2) Scaling factor for detail: <0.0000> : Enter the scale factor. Select insertion point for detail: (or R to Reference from ): Select a point (3) for the center of the detail circle or press enter to apply a relative point Scan for blocks, Polylines and dimensions (Y or N) <Yes> :Yes

2000

DPQ_DIMCENT

209

Yes The command will scan for complex object and explode them in the detail. This process can take some time in complex details. No The command will not scan for complex object in the detail. Dimension, block and Polyline objects will be copied to the detail in their entirety. Select point for text or RETURN for default: Return The scale text will be placed in the default position Point Select a point to locate the scale text (4) See also

DPQ_DIMCENT

Draws circle center lines on dimension layer From the Dimension menu, choose Center Mark From the Dimension tablet menu area, choose Center At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimcenter Select object : Use an object selection method See also

2000 [T3-K26]

DPQ_DIMCIRCUM

Creates circumferential dimensions From the Dimension toolbar, choose At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimcircum

2000

210

DPQ_DIMDIALOG

Select Reference Arc or Circle : Use an object selection method First extension line origin : Specify a point Second extension line origin (anticlockwise) : Specify a point Dimension line location : Specify a point

DPQ_DIMDIALOG

Sets limits, tolerances and number of decimal places for the current dimension style From the Dimension menu, choose AutoSYS Dialog From the Dimension tablet menu area, choose Dialog At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimdialog

2000 [T3-K29]

Display Settings
Specify the dimensioning method, and upper and lower values for limits and tolerances.
Radio Buttons Edit Boxes

Specify the type of dimensioning format to use. Enter the upper and lower values for either limits, or tolerance dimension format.

Decimal Places
Specify the number of decimal places to be shown for dimensions. Choose the required format from the radio buttons. See also

DPQ_DIMOBJECT

211

DPQ_DIMOBJECT

Set the current dim style to the dim style of an object From the Dimension menu, choose Style to object At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimobject Select dimension Use an object selection method See also

2000

DPQ_DIMLEADER

Draws a leader and multiple lines of leader text From the Dimension menu, choose Multi Leader From the Dimension tablet menu area, choose Multiline Leader At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimleader Leader start point: Specify a point Next point: Specify a point Dimension text : Enter text Text: Enter text Text: Press L See also

2000 [T3-Q26]

DPQ_DIMLINE

Generates dimension center lines between hole groups From the Dimension toolbar, choose the Center flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_dimline Select First Hole : Use an object selection method (1) Select Second Hole : Use and object selection method (2)

2000

212

DPQ_DIMREBUILD

See also

DPQ_DIMREBUILD

Performs a full dimension style rebuild The command updates the AutoSYS dimension styles to match the settings stored in the current client dimension definition file.

2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_dimrebuild See also DPQ_DIMRESET,DPQ_12DIM13,DPQ_12DIM13STY

DPQ_DIMRESET

Performs a partial dimension style rebuild The command updates the AutoSYS dimension styles to the current scale and dimension colors specified in the current client Layer definition file.
2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_dimreset See also DPQ_DIMREBUILD,DPQ_12DIM13,DPQ_12DIM13STY

DPQ_DIMSCALERESET Resets dim variable DIMLFAC to 1 for the current Dimstyle From the Dimension menu, choose Scaled Details, then Reset DIMLFAC At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimscalereset See also

2000

DPQ_DIMSCALESET

213

DPQ_DIMSCALESET

Sets dim variable DIMLFAC for the current Dimstyle From the Dimension menu, choose Scaled Details, then choose a scale At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimscaleset Scale for Detail Enlargement :<2.0> : Specify scale factor for dimensions See also

2000

DPQ_DIMTOCURRENTSTYLE Processes all dimensions and updates them to current client style settings The command searches for all dimensions and updates the style settings to match the current dimension styles defined in the drawing for the current client definition. Dimension overrides are retained.
2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_dimtocurrentstyle See also DPQ_DIMREBUILD

DPQ_DIMTOGGLE

Toggle dim variables and set style name for current Dimstyle At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimtoggle Specify dimension variable name See also

2000

214

DPQ_DIMUPDATE

DPQ_DIMUPDATE

Updates existing dimensions, to the current dimension style or decimal places From the Dimension menu, choose Update Dimension From the Dimension tablet menu area, choose Update At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dimupdate Update to Current style or Decimal places (Current Decimal) <Current>: Enter C or D, or press

2000 [T3-M27]

Current
Updates selected dimensions to the current dimension settings. Select dimensions to update Select objects: Use an object selection method Update to AUTOSYS Dimension style system(Y or N) <Yes> : Enter n, or press Layer Reset to <previous layer> AUTOSYS DIM Completed

Decimal
Number of decimal places (0 1 2 3) <0> : Enter a number Select dimensions to update Select objects: Use an object selection method Update to AUTOSYS Dimension style system(Y or N) <Yes> : Enter n, or press Layer Reset to <previous layer> AUTOSYS DIM Completed See also

DPQ_DISPCFG

Displays the AutoSYS drawing parameters data in raw format.

2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_dimdispcfg

DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT

215

See also

DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT Displays the active view port bounding box details Highlights the active model space view port bounding box and displays the bounding box details. If no bounding box is active (or one does not exist) then this will be indicated
2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_displaymsviewport See also DPQ_MSVPCREATE,DPQ_MSVPGETDATA,DPQ_MSVPRESCALE,DPQ_MVI EW

DPQ_DRAWBREAK

Draws either a pipe or straight break From the Draw toolbar, choose the Annotate flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_drawbreak Part Break type (Straight/Pipe) <Straight> : Select S or Enter for straight and P for pipe Straight Draws a straight parts break Pipe Draws a pipe break First Point for Breaking : Select a point on the part (1) Second Point : Select a point on the opposite side of the part (2) Select object(s) to trim : Select surplus lines hit enter when finished See also

2000

216

DPQ_DZOOM

DPQ_DZOOM

Zoom or pan at the aspect ratio of the current viewport The DPQ_DZOOM command functions in a similar manner to AutoCADs ZOOM DYNAMIC command, however it doesnt display the general portion of the drawing first. The advantage of this display function is that the view box represents the actual aspect ratio of the current viewport.
2000 [T3-Q23]

From the View menu, choose Zoom, then Dzoom From the Display tablet menu area, choose M At the Command prompt, enter dpq_dzoom The view box which represents your viewport can shrink or enlarge, and move around the drawing. Positioning and sizing the view box performs an appropriate PAN or ZOOM to fill the viewport with the image inside the view box. The Pan view box appears first. Drag it to the desired location and press the pick button. The Zoom view box then appears. Resize it and press to perform the zoom or press the pick button to return to the Pan view box. For more information , see Zoom In - Aspect Ratio in chapter 3, Display Control, in the AutoSYS Users Guide. See also

view box

DPQ_EDITOR

217

DPQ_EDITOR

Ascii text editor The DPQ_EDITOR is a simple line editor which can be used within AutoCAD, for simple Ascii text editing tasks. You cannot create a new file within the editor, the file must be an existing Ascii text file.
2000

From the File menu, choose Applications, then Text Editor At the Command prompt, enter dpq_editor From the Select File dialog box choose the file to edit, and choose OK.

File Description
Displays the file and directory of file being edited.

List Box
Displays the contents of the file being edited. Select single lines of text within the list box to edit. One line is edited at a time.

Edit Box
Displays the line of text selected from the List Box. Changes to the text line are made here.

New
Inserts the contents of the Edit Box to the line immediately below the position of the cursor in the List Box.

Delete
Deletes the currently selected line of text in the List Box.

218

DPQ_EXTEND

Update
Updates the selected line of text in the List Box with the contents of the Edit Box.

Cancel
Cancels the AutoSYS Editor.

Save
Saves the edited file, and closes the AutoSYS Editor dialog box. See also

DPQ_EXTEND

Extends multiple lines to a boundary edge From the Modify menu, choose Multi Extend From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Multi Extend At the Command prompt, enter dpq_extend Select boundary edge(s)..: Select objects: Use an object selection method (1) Select objects to extend..: First point of Crossing: Specify a point (2) Second point of Crossing: Specify a point (3) See also DPQ_TRIM

2000 [T1-E7]

DPQ_FBI

219

DPQ_FBI

Displays the object data list of a selected object From the Inquiry toolbar, select At the command prompt, enter dpq_fbi Select an Object: Select an object from the drawing The full object data list will be displayed on the text screen. No formatting is done. If DPQ_FBINEXT is now executed and the object was a complex object DPQ_FBINEXT will display the next object in the complex object. See also DPQ_FBINEXT

2000

DPQ_FBINEXT

Displays the object data list of the next object From the Inquiry Toolbar, select At the command prompt, enter dpq_fbinext The full object data list of the next object will be displayed on the text screen. No formatting is done. Subsequent running of DPQ_FBINEXT will continue to display the next object. If the current object is complex object DPQ_FBINEXT will display the next object in the complex object. See also DPQ_FBI

2000

DPQ_FILLET2LINES

Fillets a pair of parallel lines The inside pair of lines are filleted with the specified radius, while the outside pair of lines are filleted with the specified radius plus the distance between the parallel lines.

2000 [T1-D18]

From the Construct menu, choose Fillet, then Parallel From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Parallel Fillet At the Command prompt, enter dpq_fillet2lines

220

DPQ_FILLET2LINES

Line Spacing: <0.0> : Enter a number (1) Inside radius : <0.0> : Enter a number (2) First line on inside radius Use an object selection method (3) Second line on inside radius Use an object selection method (4) First line on outside radius Use an object selection method (5) Second line on outside radius Use an object selection method (6) See also

DPQ_GETANGLE

221

DPQ_GETANGLE

Lists the angle between two specified lines From the Edit menu, choose Inquiry, then Angular From the Inquiry tablet menu area, choose Angular At the Command prompt, enter dpq_getangle Select First Line : Use an object selection method (1) Select Second Line : Use an object selection method (1) First Angle : 243.1 Other Angle : 116.9 See also

2000 [T3-H25]

DPQ_GETVPSCALE

Displays the scale of a selected view port At the command prompt, enter dpq_getvpscale Select viewport : Select a view port The current scale factor of the view port will be displayed. See also

2000

222

DPQ_GETVPSCALE

Blank Page

DPQ_IP

223

DPQ_IP

Draws two lines from two non parallel lines to their implied intersection point The extension lines are drawn on the default dimension layer.
2000 [T1-D19]

From the Construct menu, choose Fillet, then Find IP From the Edit tablet menu, choose Intersect Fillet At the Command prompt, enter dpq_ip Select first line : Use an object selection method (1) Select second line: Use an object selection method (2) See also DPQ_IPMARK

DPQ_IPMARK

Generates an intersection point marker From the draw toolbar, choose the Annotation flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_ipmark Select first line: Select one line (1) Select second line: Select one line (2) An intersection point marker will be placed at the intersecting point. See also DPQ_IP

2000

DPQ_ITEM

Balloon reference and material listing This is the basic balloon reference option. It places a reference balloon and a pointer line to an object. A default reference number is offered for each balloon, that is automatically incremented from the last reference number used on the current drawing. Creating a material list either on the current drawing, or to a file is an option.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Material List, then Item

224

DPQ_ITEM

[T2-N2]

From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Item Listing At the Command prompt, enter dpq_item Current layer set to 3ML Item no. : <1> : Specify a number or press Pick item to list or <Enter> for multiple : Specify a point or press Multiple Options for placing additional balloon references adjacent to an existing balloon. Enter to select item or (U/ D/ L/ R) : <R> : Enter an option or press
n

R Draws a balloon reference to the right of an existing reference. U Draws a balloon reference on top of an existing reference. D Draws a balloon reference on the bottom of an existing reference. L Draws a balloon reference to the left of an existing reference.

Pick existing balloon : Use an object selection method Point Specification AutoSYS draws a leader line segment from the point specified, and continues to prompt for other points and options. Pick balloon insertion point : Specify a point List this item (Y or N) <Yes> : Enter n, or press List Items Creates a material list for the balloon reference. Place list on this drawing (Y or N) <Yes> Enter n, or press If this is the first time the material listing system has been used in the current drawing, you will be asked if you want to place the material list on the current drawing. The alternative that is implied is to write the material list as a separate text file.

DPQ_ITEM

225

Yes The material list header block will be placed in the drawing at the location set by the definition for this sheet size in the drawing sheet definition file currently in use, dpqstdsh.ini by default. The details of that file and how to set it up are given Chapter 19.

No The material list data is written to a file so it may be imported into a drawing.

Quantity : <1> : Specify a number Misc /Plate /Bar /Hex /SQuare /Flat /HOllow Bar : <Misc> : Enter an option or press
n

Misc Part number : <> : Enter characters Description (25 chr) : <> : Enter characters Size of item or length : <> Enter characters or a number Weight / Mass of each unit : < > : Enter a number Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number

Plate Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass /BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Thickness : <0> : Enter a number Width : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Bar Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters

226

DPQ_ITEM

Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number
n

Hex Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Square Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Hollow Bar Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Outside Dia : <0.0> : Enter a number Inside Dia : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number

DPQ_ITEMRESET

227

Material list on Drawing A new line is now added to the material list table. This comprises the insertion of the block called s???tma1.dwg, where the ??? is std by default or else the client code for the currently used sheet definition, and the A1" is the current sheet size or the default substitute. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for more information. The values you supplied in answer to the above prompts are placed in the block as attributes. Then the EDIT ATTRIBUTE dialogue box pops up in case you would like to modify any of the values, and to confirm them. The list items are placed on the drawing to suit their item numbers, leaving room for the future placement of items when the operator manually forces item numbers out of sequence.

Material list Written to a file The standard AutoCAD File Selection dialogue box pops up, with the current directory showing and the current drawing name with the extension changed to .lst showing as the default name. Enter a new list file or directory, or choose OK. See also DPQ_MLIST DPQ_RLIST DPQ_PITEM DPQ_ITEMRESET DPQ_LISTING

DPQ_ITEMRESET

Resets the material list generation program At the command prompt, enter dpq_itemreset The setting that identifies whether the material list is located on the current drawing or not, is cleared. See also DPQ_ITEM DPQ_MLIST DPQ_RLIST DPQ_PITEM DPQ_LISTING

2000

228

DPQ_ITEMRESET

Blank Page

DPQ_JOINLINE

229

DPQ_JOINLINE

Joins two coincident or overlapping lines From the Draw toolbar, choose the Special edit flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_joinline First Line: Select first line Second Line: Select second line The two lines will be made into one continuous line See also

2000

DPQ_JUMPLINE

Breaks crossing lines or dimensions From the Modify toolbar, choose the Break flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_jumpline Break Type (Jump/Arc) <Jump> : Enter A for arc or enter for Jump Jump Select line to Jump : Select the line or dimension to break (1) Select intersection point : Specify a point (2) (the int snap will apply) Arc Select line to Arc : Select the line or dimension to break (1) Select intersection point : Specify a point (2) (the int snap will apply) The arc will be draw over the selected line and you will be prompted This side OK (Y or N) <Yes> : Enter Y or Enter to keep the arc on the displayed side or N to flip sides See also

2000

230

DPQ_JUMPLINE

Blank Page

DPQ_LAYER

231

DPQ_LAYER

Sets and creates layers From the Layer menu, choose Set Current Layer, then Dialog From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Layer At the Command prompt, enter dpq_layer

2000 [T1-D21]

Layer colour as specified by pen size

In the AutoSYS Layer Control dialog box, you can make a new layer from the predefined main and secondary names, with varying colours and linetypes.

Pen Size
Specifies the layer colour and plotting pen size.

Extended Layer
Specifies the main and secondary layer names for the layer to be made or set.
Main Secondary Select

Indicates the current main layer name. Indicates the current secondary layer name. Choose the Select button to select a different main or secondary layer name. Refer to DPQ_LAYEREXTENDED command for more detail.

Line Type
Select the type of line required for the layer

232

DPQ_LAYCONVERT

Layer Name
Indicates the full layer name to be set / made.

DPQ_LAYCONVERT

Performs a conversion from one layer system to another At the command prompt, enter dpq_layconvert Select a conversion name and hit OK

2000

The entire drawing will be processed and all layer names converted

Conversion parameter
This lists the available layer mappings

Edit
This allows you to edit an existing layer map list The syntax for the conversion is The layer map file, layermap.ini, must be located on the AutoSYS search path. Each layer map definition is identified by a section header name enclosed in square brackets. Each layer name conversion is placed on anew line, as follows: [MAP NAME] Layer name to convert=New Layer name;color

DPQ_LAYEREXTENDED

233

Layers not listed or set with no map parameters, (nothing after the =), in the map file will be ignored Although existing layer mapping can be edited using the dialog, new mapping must be entered using an editor like Notepad. The command line version of this program is DPQLAYERCONVERT The syntax is (dpqlayerconvert "layermapname") the layermapname must match a layer map name header defined in the file layermap.ini

DPQ_LAYEREXTENDED Sets the default main and secondary layer names From the Layer menu, choose Enhanced Layer, then Dialog From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Main Layer At the Command prompt, enter dpq_layerextended

2000 [T1-A21]

Main Layer
Displays the current list of main layer names. Choose the one you want as the main layer name. Selecting None as the main layer name will also select None for the secondary layer name. A new main layer name may also be entered in the edit box.

Secondary Layer
Displays the current list of secondary layer names. Choose the one you want as

234

DPQ_LAYERMAKE

the secondary layer name. Selecting None as the secondary layer name is indicated by three under scores. A new secondary layer name may also be entered in the edit box.

DPQ_LAYERMAKE

Sets the current layer based on pen thickness & line type This command is designed to be run from a menu macro, and as such has no prompts. It is the main mechanism AutoSYS uses to establish the correct client layer based on the pen thickness and linetype chosen from a menu item. It can however be run from the command line as follows :

2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_layermake Enter the Pen thickness Enter the Line type code The pen thickness and linetype code must match codes defined in the client layer definition file. The layer name will be constructed using the current setting for Main and Secondary layer. If the layer does not exist, it will be created.

DPQ_LAYERMODE

Controls layer visibility From the Layer menu, choose Layer Control From the Layer tablet menu area, choose any layer visibility function i.e. Freeze, Thaw, On, Off, Lock, or Unlock.

2000 [T1-D25]

DPQ_LAYERMODE

235

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_layermode

Selection
Determines what criteria to control layer visibility by. Each option has a different list. The lists reflect the currently applied layer structure.
Main

Select a main layer to control visibility.

Secondary

Select a secondary layer to control visibility.

Pen

Select a pen thickness (colour) to control visibility.

236

DPQ_LAYEROFF

Line Type

Select a line type to control visibility.

Include

Controls visibility of layer selection specified above.. If off visibility control is applied to all other layers not specified by selection criteria.
Xref

Allows a xref to be selected and apply the xref path to the layer structure

Control
Specifies the type of layer control to apply.

Current
Displays the current layer selection criteria.

Apply To
Specifies which space and floating viewports to control layers in.
Global Current All Select

Applies the layer visibility to model space and paper space. Applies the layer visibility to the current floating viewport only (paper space only). Applies the layer visibility to all the floating viewports (paper space only). Applies the layer visibility to a selected floating viewports. After choosing the Apply button you will be prompted to select the floating viewport (paper space only).

DPQ_LAYEROFF

Turn off a layer by selecting an object on that layer From the Layer menu, choose Select Control, then Select To Turn Off From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Select - Layer Off

2000 [T1-A29]

DPQ_LAYERON

237

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_layeroff Select object on the desired layer: Use an object selection method All objects on the same layer as the object selected will be turned off.

DPQ_LAYERON

Turns all layers off except a specified layer From the Layer menu, choose Select Control, then All Off Except From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Select - All Off Except At the Command prompt, enter dpq_layeron Enter Layer name or Enter to Select object : Enter text, or press Object Selection Select object on the desired layer: Use an object selection method All objects on the same layer as the object selected remain on, all other layers will be turned off.

2000 [T1-A30]

DPQ_LAYERSET

Sets the current layer to the layer of a selected object From the Layer menu, choose Set To object From the Layer tablet menu area, choose Set To object At the Command prompt, enter dpq_layerset Select object on the desired layer: Use an object selection method

2000 [T1-D24]

DPQ_LIBMANAGER

Creates and manages symbol libraries From the Standard toolbar, choose the Enhanced flyout, then Library Manager At the command prompt, enter dpq_libmanager Each section of the dialog will now be explained

2000

238

DPQ_LIBMANAGER

Library Paths
This section specifies and allow you to search for the location of the directories that contain the library and product library files Library Directory Allows you to browse for a library directory. Where the .lib and .slb files will be stored
Product Directory

Allows you to browse for a product directory. The parent directory where the symbols are stored. Individual products directories can be created under this parent directory.

DPQ_LIBMANAGER

239

Current Libraries
This section specifies and allow you to select or delete current libraries, add new and prepare to generate library files. Library list box Display the list of current libraries.
Clear to Add

Clears the Library title and library edit boxes ready for a new library Adds the new library to the list Modifies the current library to the new settings Deletes the current library entry. But not the library files. Allows new block to be added to the library. If the drawings selected are already in the library then the existing entries will be updated. Displays the current library title or used to enter the name of a new title. Allows you to browse for an existing library file .lib

Add Modify Delete Append

Library title

Library

Image
This section specifies the displayed image used in DPQ_LIBRARY when selecting a library. Select Allow you to browse a slide library (.slb) for an image.

New Library Parameters

This section specifies how a new library will be built and slides generated. Show Name Will generate a slide with the file name at top center.
Remove Tag Show IP

Will generate a slide without attribute tags displayed. Will generate a slide with an Insertion point marker shown. Will generate a library with pathing set to the correct product sub directory. Will generate a slide as at the last save for the dwg file.

Use Product dir.

Use saved view

General
Save

Save the changes made.

240

DPQ_LIBMANAGER

Create

Saves the changes made and proceeds to generate the new library. Changes are discarded and the program terminates.

Cancel

Directories Explained
A product directory is a directory with a number of sub directories under it. Each sub directory containing a different set of block files. If a library is generated using the product directory option then DPQ_LIBRARY will search the actual product sub directory under the product directory for the block file to insert

Generating a new library

1. At the command prompt, enter dpq_libmanager The library manager dialog will be displayed 2. Choose the Clear to add button This will clear the Library title and library edit boxes 3. Enter the name of the new library title. Any descriptive title will do. This is the title used in DPQ_LIBRARY. 4. Enter the name of the library. This is the new library file name (.lib). Insertion parameters will be written to this file for each block. This file and the Slide file (.slb) will be placed in the directory specified by Library path. 5. From the Library Parameters Section, Choose the slide and library options you require. 6. Choose Create The file selection dialog, above will be displayed 7. Choose the directory containing the block files you wish to be in your new library 8. Choose the files 9. Choose OK Each file selected will be brought up and a slide made and added to the slide

DPQ_LIBRARY

241

library name specified. This file will be placed in the directory specified in Library directory. The file location and insertion parameters will be added to the library file which will also be placed in the directory specified in Library directory. If either of the files exist then the blocks selected and the slides created will be either added to the existing files or the existing entries will be updated to reflect the new settings. The new library title will be added to the list of libraries stored in the AutoSYS system file, autosys.ini

DPQ_LIBRARY

Displays and inserts symbols from symbol libraries From the Standard toolbar, choose the enhanced flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_library

2000

242

DPQ_LINESTOPOINT

Select the library you wish to display then select OK

Select the scaling method then select the block Insertion point: Select a point Rotation angle: Select an angle

DPQ_LINESTOPOINT

Changes end of several lines to a coincident point From the Modify toolbar, choose the Special Edit flyout, then At the command prompt, enter dpq_linestopoint Change line ends in current UCS Select objects: Use an object selection method Extend to ordinate X,Y,Line,Perpendicular or point /X/Y/L/P/S : Select the method for changing the line end

2000

DPQ_LISTING

243

X Adjusts the line end point to the X co ordinate of the selected point Select point for X ordinate (or ENTER to Reference from ): Select a point Y Adjusts the line end point to the X co ordinate of the selected point Select point for Y ordinate (or ENTER to Reference from ): Select a point Line Adjusts the line end point to the endpoint of the line selected Choose to line Select (or ENTER to Reference from ): Use an object selection method to choose a line Perpendicular Adjusts the line end point perpendicular to the line selected Choose perpendicular line (or ENTER to Reference from ): Use an object selection method to choose a line Points Adjusts the line end point a point selected 1st point: Select a point 2nd point: Select a point Select point: Select a point

DPQ_LISTING

Displays the Material listing selection dialog From the Material Listing toolbar, choose At the command prompt, enter dpq_listing Select the item you wish to perform then select OK

2000

244

DPQ_LRS

DPQ_LRS

Reinitialises the client layer system At the command prompt, enter dpq_lrs The client layer definitions are reloaded from scratch. See also

2000

DPQ_LRS

245

Blank Page

DPQ_MAINSHEET

247

DPQ_MAINSHEET

Display the full drawing view From the Standard toolbar, choose the Zoom flyout then, At the command prompt, enter dpq_mainsheet The full drawing sheet view is displayed See also DPQ_VIEW

2000

DPQ_MEASURE

Places blocks at intervals, measured or divided, on an object This command is similar to the AutoCAD MEASURE command, however it displays a File dialog box so wblocks may be inserted at measured intervals.
2000

From the Construct menu, choose Block Divide At the Command prompt, enter dpq_measure Select Line or Polyline to work on : Use an object selection method Select a wblock using the Block to Insert dialog box. Measure or Divide (Measure Divide) <Measure> : Type D or press Measure Align with object(Y or N) <Yes> : Type N or press Segment length<0.0> : Specify a distance Divide Align with object(Y or N) <Yes> : Type N or press No of divisions<3> : Enter a value See also DPQ_DIVIDE

DPQ_MIDLINE

Creates a line midway between two lines From the Construct menu, choose Offset, then Midline

2000

248

DPQ_MLIST

[T2-K1]

From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Mid Line At the Command prompt, enter dpq_midline

1 2

Select first line: Use an object selection method (1) Select second line: Use an object selection method (2) Perpendicular osnap is automatically set for selection of the second line. The midline drawn will be placed on the same layer, be parallel to, and will be the same length as the first line selected.

DPQ_MLIST

Creates a material list From the Draw menu, choose Material List, then List Only At the Command prompt, enter dpq_mlist Item no. : <1> : Specify a number or press Place list on this drawing (Y or N) <Yes> Enter n, or press If this is the first time the material listing system has been used in the current drawing, you will be asked if you want to place the material list on the current drawing. The alternative that is implied is to write the material list as a separate text file.
n

2000

Yes The material list header block will be placed in the drawing at the location set by the definition for this sheet size in the drawing sheet definition file currently in use, dpqstdsh.ini by default. The details of that file and how to set it up are given in the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide.

No The material list data is written to a file so it may be imported into a drawing.

Quantity : <1> : Specify a number Misc /Plate /Bar /Hex /SQuare /Flat /HOllow Bar : <Misc> : Enter an option or press

DPQ_MLIST

249

Misc Part number : <> : Enter characters Description (25 chr) : <> : Enter characters Size of item or length : <> Enter characters or a number Weight / Mass of each unit : < > : Enter a number Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number

Plate Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass /BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Thickness : <0> : Enter a number Width : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Bar Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Hex Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points

250

DPQ_MLIST

Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number

n

Square Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Hollow Bar Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Outside Dia : <0.0> : Enter a number Inside Dia : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number

Material list on Drawing A new line is now added to the material list table. This comprises the insertion of the block called s???tma1.dwg, where the ??? is std by default or else the client code for the currently used sheet definition, and the A1" is the current sheet size or the default substitute. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for more information. The values you supplied in answer to the above prompts are placed in the block as attributes. Then the EDIT ATTRIBUTE dialogue box pops up in case you would like to modify any of the values, and to confirm them. The list items are placed on the drawing to suit their item numbers, leaving

DPQ_MOVEROTATE

251

room for the future placement of items when the operator manually forces item numbers out of sequence.

Material list Written to a file The standard AutoCAD File Selection dialogue box pops up, with the current directory showing and the current drawing name with the extension changed to .lst showing as the default name. Enter a new list file or directory, or choose OK. See also DPQ_LIST DPQ_RLIST

DPQ_MOVEROTATE

Moves and rotates objects in one operation From the Modify menu, choose Move Rotate From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Move Rotate At the Command prompt, enter dpq_moverotate Select objects: Use an object selection method, or press Select base/pivot point : (or ENTER to Reference from ):

2000 [T1-E8]

Specify a point (1), or press Select second pivot point : (or R to Reference from ): Specify a point (2), or enter R 2 Select rotation angle : <0.0> : Specify an angle See also DPQ_COPYROTATE r14 BONUS TOOLS

DPQ_MSVPCREATE

Creates model space viewport bounding boxes View port bounding boxes are Polylines with additional data to define an area of

252

DPQ_MSVPCREATE

common scale and object units parameters. This is the main method AutoSYS uses to define scale within a defined area.
2000

From the Model space view port toolbar, choose At the Command prompt, enter dpq_msvpcreate First Corner : Select a corner for the new viewport bounding box L Other Corner : Select the other corner The following dialog box will be displayed

Viewport Parameters
Viewport Scale

The Viewport scale is the scale at which this area will be displayed in the final drawing. To select the scale choose from a scale in the pull down, the chosen scale will be displayed in the left hand edit box, Or you can enter the scale manually, in the left edit box.

Object Parameters
Enlargement FactorSpecifies

the ratio between full size and the scale of the objects contained in the viewport. If this viewport contains objects drawn full size then this factor will be 1.0. If the objects are scaled up or down (not full size) then enter the scaled value. If the objects have been scaled up by a factor of 2 then enter 2.

Block Scale Factor Specifies

the scale factor in which text in blocks will be scale in relation to the set scale factor. If this feature is not valid then it will be greyed out.

Object Units
Units

Defines the drawing units used to draw objects in this viewport bounding box. If 1 drawing unit is 1 meter then choose METER If 1 drawing unit is 1 millimetre then choose millimetre. This will establish the relationship between the object units and the units the drawing sheets have been defined in the current client definition. This allows METER drawings to be defined within drawing sheets drawn with millimetre units.

DPQ_MSVPGETDATA

253

See also DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT,DPQ_MSVPGETDATA,DPQ_MSVPRESCALE,D PQ_MVIEW,DPQ_MSVPCREATE,DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT

DPQ_MSVPGETDATA

Displays the Viewport bounding box data From the Model space view port toolbar, choose At the Command prompt, enter dpq_msvpgetdata See also DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT,DPQ_MSVPRESCALE,DPQ_MVIEW;DPQ_MS VPCREATE,DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT

2000

DPQ_MSVPRESCALE

Rescales model space viewport bounding boxes This command allows existing viewport bounding boxes to be rescaled. In a future release this command will also apply the new parameters to the objects inside the bounding box.

2000

From the Model space view port toolbar, choose At the Command prompt, enter dpq_msvprescale See also DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT,DPQ_MSVPGETDATA,DPQ_MVIEW;DPQ_MS VPCREATE,DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT

DPQ_MTEXT

Creates paragraph text at standard heights This is the standard AutoCAD MTEXT command which has standard text heights pre-set.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Multi Text, then a text height At the Command prompt, enter dpq_mtext Text Height 0.18 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.50 0.70 1.00 2.00: <> : Enter an option (command line usage only)

254

DPQ_MVIEW

Current layer set to correct Layer as defined by the client Text Definition Parameters. First Corner: Specify the first corner of the rectangle Other corner: Specify the other corner of the rectangle You will be placed in the standard MTEXT dialog to complete the command. See also DPQ_TEXT

DPQ_MVIEW

Creates and scales floating viewports from VP bounding boxes This is similar to the AutoCAD MVIEW command but obtains viewport sizing and scale from a selected Model Space Viewport bounding box
2000

From the Viewport Utilities Toolbar, choose At the Command prompt, enter dpq_mview First point : Select a corner for the new viewport Second point : Select the other corner for the viewport The size for the viewport is not important as it will be changed to suit the area defined by the selected viewport bounding box. Show isometric (Y or N) Yes : Choose No if all bounding boxes are on the WCS. Choose Yes if viewport bounding boxes are not all on the same UCS, this makes it easier to identify the correct box for the new viewport. Select a point or enter to select a view port bounding box : Select a point inside the correct bounding box, or if this is not possible hit enter and then select the actual bounding box. Is this Orientation correct ?(Y or N) Yes : Choose Yes if the orientation is correct or choose No to cycle until the correct orientation is found then choose Yes. See also DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT,DPQ_MSVPGETDATA,DPQ_MVIEW;DPQ_MS VPCREATE,DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT

DPQ_OFFSET/2

255

DPQ_OFFSET/2

Offset by a specified distance divided by two From the Construct menu, choose Offset, then Offset/2 At the Command prompt, enter dpq_offset/2 Input total offset distance :<0.0> : Enter a number or press Select object to offset: Use an object selection method (1) Side to offset? Specify a point (2) See Also DPQ_OFFSETIMP/2 DPQ_OFFSET DPQ_OFFSETIMPERIAL

2000

offset/2

DPQ_OFFSETIMP/2

Offset by a specified distance divided by two (imperial) Imperial equivalent of DPQ_OFFSET/2 command. The offset dimension is processed as an imperial distance.

2000

From the Construct menu, choose Offset, then Offsetimp/2 At the Command prompt, enter dpq_offsetimp/2 Offset distance <2.000> : Enter a number or press Select object to offset: Use an object selection method (1) Side to offset? Specify a point (2) See also DPQ_OFFSETIMP/2 DPQ_OFFSET DPQ_OFFSETIMPERIAL

offset/2

256

DPQ_OFFSETIMPERIAL

DPQ_OFFSETIMPERIAL Offset by a specified imperial distance Imperial equivalent of the AutoCAD OFFSET command. The offset dimension is processed as an imperial distance.
2000

From the Construct menu, choose Offset, then Offset Imperial At the Command prompt, enter dpq_offsetimperial Offset distance <0.0> : Enter a number or press Select object to offset: Use an object selection method (1) Side to offset? Specify a point (2) See Also DPQ_OFFSETIMP/2 DPQ_OFFSET DPQ_OFFSETIMPERIAL

offset distanc

DPQ_ORTHOVPORT

Generates an orthographic view port set From the Viewport Utilities tool bar At the command prompt, enter dpq_orthovport First point : Select lower left corner Second point : Select upper right corner. An orthographic view port set will be created and a Zoom All performed on each new port. Viewports will be changed to the layer specified in the layer definition file

2000

257

DPQ_PARALLEL

Offset and lengthen a line or pline by a specified distance DPQ_PARALLEL creates a line parallel to a specified line, and at a specified new length. Lines and pline line segments can be offset. Entities that are a part of a block definition can also be selected.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Parallel Line At the Command prompt, enter dpq_parallel Select line: Use an object selection method (1) Offset distance: <0.0> : Enter a number or press From point: Specify a point (2) To point: Specify a point (3) To point: Specify a point or press 2 3 PLine 2

1 Line DPQ_PARTBREAKLINE Draws a parts break

This command applies multiple break symbols to a new or existing lines.

2000

From the Modify toolbar choose the Break flyout then At the command prompt, enter dpq_partbreakline Select first point or return to select a line : Pick a point if you wish to draw the break line or hit enter to seelcet a line. If you selected a point, continue pick points untill the line is completed then hit enter If you hit enter to select a line or lines. : Use object selecetion method to pick line entities. Hit enter when done For each line segment enter the Number of breaks <0> : Enter the number of symbols required. See also DPQ_BREAKATLINE DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN DPQ_BREAKCHANGE DPQ_BREAKEND DPQ_BREAKEQUAL DPQ_BREAKINT
257

258

Chapter 27

DPQ_PITEM

Part number reference and material listing This is a basic part number reference option. It places a part number reference block on the drawing. Creating a material list either on the current drawing, or to a file is an option.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Material List, then Part Number At the Command prompt, enter dpq_pitem Current layer set to 3ML Item Number : <1> : Specify a number or press L Part number : < > : Enter characters or press L Pick location Specify a point

List this item (Y or N) <Yes> : Enter n, or press L List Items Creates a material list for the part number reference. Place list on this drawing (Y or N) <Yes> Enter n, or press If this is the first time the material listing system has been used in the current drawing, you will be asked if you want to place the material list on the current drawing. The alternative that is implied is to write the material list as a separate text file.
n

Yes The material list header block will be placed in the drawing at the location set by the definition for this sheet size in the drawing sheet definition file currently in use, dpqstdsh.ini by default. The details of that file and how to set it up are given in section 4 of this manual.

No The material list data is written to a file so it may be imported into a drawing.

Quantity : <1> : Specify a number Misc /Plate /Bar /Hex /SQuare /Flat /HOllow Bar : <Misc> : Enter an option or press
n

Misc Part number : <> : Enter characters

259

Description (25 chr) : <> : Enter characters Size of item or length : <> Enter characters or a number Weight / Mass of each unit : < > : Enter a number Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number
n

Plate Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass /BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Thickness : <0> : Enter a number Width : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Bar Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Hex Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number
259

260

Chapter 27

Square Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Size of bar : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number Hollow Bar Select Material - Steel /Aluminum /St St /Copper /Lead /Brass/BRonze /PVC /GRP /PhosphorBronze /Glass: <Steel> : Enter an option or press Part number : < > : Enter characters Outside Dia : <0.0> : Enter a number Inside Dia : <0.0> : Enter a number Length (mm) (Or pick 2 points) : <0.0> : Enter a number or specify two points Material Grade : <250> : Enter a number

Material list on Drawing A new line is now added to the material list table. This comprises the insertion of the block called s???tma1.dwg, where the ??? is std by default or else the client code for the currently used sheet definition, and the A1" is the current sheet size or the default substitute. See the AutoSYS Installation and Customisation Guide for more information. The values you supplied in answer to the above prompts are placed in the block as attributes. Then the EDIT ATTRIBUTE dialogue box pops up in case you would like to modify any of the values, and to confirm them. The list items are placed on the drawing to suit their item numbers, leaving room for the future placement of items when the operator manually forces item numbers out of sequence.

261

Material list Written to a file The standard AutoCAD File Selection dialogue box pops up, with the current directory showing and the current drawing name with the extension changed to .lst showing as the default name. Enter a new list file or directory, or choose OK.

261

262

Chapter 27

DPQ_PLOT

Plots a drawing Dialog box interface to plot a drawing which has been set up by AutoSYS.
2000 [T1-E20]

From the Standard Toolbar, choose the AutoSYS Plot button Choose Plot from tablet menu. At the Command prompt, enter dpq_plot

Plotter
Displays the current plotting device, and allows sheet and output configuration.
Plotter List

The pop up list box displays all the configured plotter devices. Select another one by choosing the arrow and picking the description of the plotter/printer required. AutoSYS will plot to the default plotter. To add a plotter, modify the AutoCAD plotter configuration, see the AutoCAD CONFIG command.

263

Config

Configures the default plotters sheet sizes, origin settings, and output port. Choose the CONFIG button to edit the current configuration. See Plotter Parameters Dialog Box on page 264

Output
Controls the plot output. Sheet size of drawing being Output port or to a file

Sheet size to plot drawing on to

Use Scale

Plot drawing according to scale set in AutoSYS Setup dialog box when drawing was created, or rescaled. When off other sheet sizes are enabled in the Sheet Plot to -> pop up list, as defined in the Plotter Parameters dialog box.
Border

Automatically turns on the title sheet layers so they will be plotted with the rest of the drawing. Once the plot is complete these layers are frozen again. Future feature

Copies

Plot Area
Normal Display Limits Extents Trimmed

Plots a window from 0,0 (current UCS) to the maximum limits Plots the current display Plots w window from the minimum limits to the maximum limits Plots the extents of the drawing Plots window as defined in the current client drawing sheet size parameters PlotLowerLeft and PlotUpperRight. If these do not exist for the sheet then Normal will be used.

Rotation and Origin

263

264

Chapter 27

Displays the Plot Rotation and Origin dialog box.

Select a rotation radio button to rotate the plot in a clockwise direction. The plot normally begins in the lower-left corner of the paper (the home position). Enter the plot origin in the X Origin and Y Origin text boxes to place the plot origin at another location on the paper. On some plotters you can use negative co-ordinates.
Plotter Control

Executes program specified by Plotter Control in the Plotter Parameters dialog box.

Plot Type
Selection and edit plotter control file ( AutoCAD plot configuration parameter .pcp file).
Plot Type List

Lists all the AutoCAD plot configuration parameter (.pcp) files found in the Plotterpcp= path, see AutoSYS preferences - System Plotter Options. Choose the control file applicable to the plotter selection. Edits the AutoCAD plot configuration parameter file selected in the Plot Type List. Although you can edit any part of the pcp file with this editor, it if there a number of pen parameters to change, it may be preferable to do this in the AutoCAD PLOT dialog box. Displays the directory that is being searched for .pcp files

Edit

Plot Type Message

Plotter Parameters Dialog Box

265

Configures the default plotterssheet parameters and plotter output port device.

Sheet Sizes
Specifies and configures sheet sizes and origin settings for default plotter.
Sheet Size List

Displays the sheet sizes set up for the default plotter. To edit a sheet size pick one of the sheet sizes in the list box. The size and origin settings will reflect the current settings for the sheet size selected. Creates a new sheet size. Choose the New button, then enter a new sheet size in the edit box. Enter the width and height plot sizes in the X and Y edit boxes for the selected sheet size. Specifies the rotation to be used for this sheet size. Note if plotting drawings that containing windows linked then the rotation must be 0 (and the plotter chosen must be a system printer) to plot correctly.
265

New Plot Size Plot Rotation

266

Chapter 27

Origin

Enter the plot X origin and Y origin for the selected sheet size. The origin of the plot is normally at the lower left corner of the sheet (0,0). Values in the Origin will offset the plot according to the magnitude and direction of the values. Specifies the spooling option, either Disabled, ON or OFF. Check if this is required by plotting using the standard AutoCAD plot. Indicates that the specified size exceeds the max. plot size of the default plotter. This will only be required if during a plot a prompt indicating that the maximum size that the plotter can plot is exceeded by the specified plot size. This usually occurs when using a HP-GL plotter configuration to output to a none HP plotter. This is really not required but included for upward compatibility from earlier versions of AutoSYS. Deletes the currently selected sheet size. Updates the size and origin data to the currently selected sheet size. If creating a new sheet size it is added to the sheet size list. Displays the output port which the plot will be sent to. If File is selected, then a plot file (.plt) will be created with the same name as the drawing file being edited. If your plotter is supplied with a configuration program which can be called from within AutoCAD, such as the HPCONFIG program for the HP Designjet plotters, then this can be entered. You can run the program by choosing Plotter Control from the AutoSYS Quick Plot dialog box.

Spooling

Oversize

Delete Update

Output

Plotter Control

DPQ_PREFDEFAULT

Customises the default parameter file Edits the default client parameter file. This command is usually accessed from within the AutoSYS Preferences command.

2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_prefdefault See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

267

DPQ_PREFDIM

Customises the dimension parameter file Edits the current client dimension parameter file. This command is usually accessed from within the AutoSYS Preferences command.
2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_prefdim See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_PREFDRAWING

Customises the drawing sheet parameter file Edits the current client drawing sheet parameter file. This command is usually accessed from within the AutoSYS Preferences command.

2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_prefdrawing See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_PREFERENCES

Customises the AutoSYS and client definition settings. At the Command prompt, enter dpq_preferences A full explanation of this command can be found in the AutoSYS Installation and customisation guide

2000

DPQ_PREFLAYER

Customises the layer parameter file Edits the current client layer parameter file. This command is usually accessed from within the AutoSYS Preferences command.
2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_preflayer

267

268

Chapter 27

See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_PREFSYSTEM

Customises the AutoSYS System file Edits the AutoSYS system (Autosys.ini) parameter file. This command is usually accessed from within the AutoSYS Preferences command.

2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_prefsystem See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_PREFTEXT

Customises the text parameter file Edits the current client text parameter file. This command is usually accessed from within the AutoSYS Preferences command.
2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_preftext See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_PSPACEONLY

Sets the correct MODE for placing paper objects Sets the correct values for Tilemode and Paper space for the correct placement of Paper objects based on the current sheet settings.

2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_pspaceonly

DPQ_PURGEDPQ

Removes AutoSYS V7.0 and earlier parameters from the drawing. This removes all traces of the block DPQ_SET form the drawing file. All

269

AutoSYS drawing parameters will be lost. A better option would be to use DPQ_RESACLE.
2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_purgedpq See also DPQ_RESCALE

269

DPQ_RECOM

271

DPQ_RECOM

Undefines AutoCAD commands AutoSYS redefines a number of AutoCAD commands to de sure all draw and dimension parameters are honoured correctly. You can undefine these commands in the current drawing. The next drawing edited will have the command redefined again. To permanently undefine the commands set the REDEFINED option in the AutoSYS system preferences to off.
2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_recom See also Chapter 15 System Preferences

DPQ_RECTANGLE

Draws a rectangle using polyline segments or lines From the Draw menu, choose Polygon, then Enhanced From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Square At the Command prompt, enter dpq_rectangle I.P.<TLeft Top TRight CLeft Center CRight BLeft Bottom BRight>:<BL> : Enter an option or press Select BLeft point (or ENTER to Reference from ): Specify a point Angle of horizontal side <0.0> : Specify an angle Horizontal Length <0.0> : Enter a distance or press Vertical Length <0.0> : Enter a distance or press Use a Line or Polyline (Line Polyline) <Line> : Enter P or press See also DPQ_TEXTBOX

2000 [T2-P3]

TL CL BL

TR C

BR

DPQ_REINITP

Checks the integrity of the plotter definition file Checks the integrity of the plotter definition file using information obtained from DPQDEFLT.INI This function is performed whenever running DPQ_PREFERENCES

272

DPQ_REINITS

2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_reinitp See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_REINITS

Checks the integrity of the drawing sheet definition file Checks the integrity of the drawing sheet definition file using information obtained from DPQDEFLT.INI This function is performed whenever running DPQ_PREFERENCES
2000

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_reinits See also DPQ_PREFERENCES

DPQ_RESCALE

273

DPQ_RESCALE

Rescales features of a drawing The drawing sheet, text styles and dimensions can be rescaled at any time during the course of editing your drawing. Existing text will not be scaled, however any new text created will be at the new scale.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Title Sheets, then Rescale

Drawing Format
The drawing sheet can be attached to the drawing in either model space, or paper space.
Model Drawing

The drawing sheet is inserted in model space and is scaled up by the scale factor. The drawing is plotted using the scale factor to reduce the drawing sheet down to the real size of the paper size.

274

DPQ_RESCALE

Paper/Model

The drawing sheet is inserted in paper space and is not scaled using the scale factor. A floating viewport is created within the border. You draw objects in model space full size. The viewports are scaled independently using the DPQ_ZOOMXP command. The drawing is plotted at a scale of 1:1. Check this box if you want a title sheet inserted.

Insert Title

Units
Specifies which measurement system to use.

Applications
Specifies the add-on package to load when the next drawing is created, or opened.
Application Name Select

Displays the add-on application name which will be loaded. Runs AutoSYSs DPQ_EXECUTE command. For more information, see the DPQ_EXECUTE command in The Application Loader users guide.

Ext Reference
Specifies the name of an external reference drawing file which will be attached to the next drawing file created, or opened.
Xref Name Select

Displays the add-on application name which will be loaded. Displays the Select File dialog box. Choose the drawing file, and choose OK.

Paper Parameters
Specifies the parameters used to setup the paper size and scale of the drawing.
Client Name

The client code defines the set of title blocks, drawing sheets, revision blocks, and plotter configuration parameters which are used to create the drawing, and control plotting. Select the client code from the pop up list. The scale is used to scale up features such as the drawing sheet, text, and dimensions created in model space. Select the scale from the pop up list box, or enter a new scale in the edit box. A valid entry is any number. Drawing sheet size. Choose a size from the pop up list.

Scale 1:

Paper Size

DPQ_REVISION

275

Text
Displays the text parameters specified for the client selected.

Initialisation Files
The Sheet and Client initialisation files used in the drawing setup are displayed at the bottom of the AutoSYS Drawing Setup dialog box. See also Chapter 3 Getting Started

DPQ_REVISION

Creates a drawing revision list A revision update is created on the drawing, and a comma delimited file is written to the hard disk with the information of the revision. The title sheet must be in the drawing prior to placing the first revision.

2000

From the Draw menu, choose Title Sheets, then Revision

[T2-O1]

From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Revision

276

DPQ_REVISION

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_revision

D.C.N. No
Drawing change note number reference. The drawing number is appended with the revision reference, and added to the D.C.N. file.

Rev
Revision reference.

Revised By
Automatically enters the name entered in the drawing title block Drawn By attribute.

Date
Date, as set by the computer clock, automatically entered by AutoSYS.

Description
Enter a short description of the revision changes. The description is added to the revision block when inserted. If the number of characters exceeds 50, then the description Refer to D.C.N. will be inserted on the drawing and the description you entered will be added to the CDF file created.

Reason for Change

Enter any necessary description for the revision. This description is added to the D.C.N. file along with the D.C.N. number reference specified above.

DPQ_RLIST

277

Revision Mismatch Dialog Box

Whenever the revision in the title block doesnt match the last revision in the drawing revision table you will be prompted as to whether you wish to update the revision in the title block to match the last revision found.

Yes

Updates the revision in the title block to match the highest revision found in the drawing revision table.
No

Cancels revision insert.

See also Chapter 19 Title blocks and drawing sheets

DPQ_RLIST

Creates a material list from data saved to a file The material list information which can optionally be written to a file by the AutoSYS DPQ_ITEM, DPQ_MLIST and DPQ_PITEM commands, is placed back onto the drawing using this command.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Material List, then Import List At the Command prompt, enter dpq_rlist From the Material List File dialog box choose a .lst file. Delete list file from disc (Y or N) <Yes> : Enter n or press See also DPQ_ITEM DPQ_MLIST DPQ_PITEM DPQ_ITEMRESET DPQ_LISTING

DPQ_ROTATE

Rotates objects about a 3D axis From the Modify menu, choose Rotate 3D

2000

278

DPQ_ROTATE

[T1-E9]

From the Modify tablet menu area, choose Rotate 3D At the Command prompt, enter dpq_rotate Select objects: Use an object selection method Axis of rotation X/Y/Z : <X> : Enter an option or press Degrees of rotation : <0.0> : Specify a scale or press Base point <0,0,0> : Specify a point or press See also AutoCAD ROTATE3D

DPQ_ROTATE

279

Blank Page

DPQ_SECTION

281

DPQ_SECTION

Draws section symbols The type of section symbols used can be customised for either end of the section.The layer the section is drawn on is specified in the layer preferences. See the Customisation Guide for more information relating to block selection and rotation preferences.
2000 [T2-Q3]

From the Draw menu, choose Section Labels, then Section From the Draw tablet menu area, choose Sections At the Command prompt, enter dpq_section Section reference: <1> : Enter a value Drawing reference: <-> : Enter a value Section plane from point: (or ENTER to Reference from ): Specify a point (1). To point: (or R to Reference from ): Specify a point (2). Pick side for section direction: Specify a point (3). Next corner point : (or R to Reference from ): Specify a point (4). Next corner point : (or R to Reference from ): Specify a point (5). Next corner point : (or R to Reference from ): Press . See Also DPQ_LIBRARY DPQ_LIBRARY DPQ_SECTIONBLOCK

DPQ_SECTIONBLOCK

Inserts section symbols At the command prompt, enter dpq_sectionblock Section Block Name : Enter the block name The block will be inserted at the drawing scale factor. This command is not designed for interactive use. It main purpose is to provide access to section blocks from a menu. See also DPQ_SECTION DPQ_LIBRARY DPQ_LIBRARY

2000

282

DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT

DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT Sets a viewport bounding box to be active From the Model space view port toolbar, choose At the Command prompt, enter dpq_setmsviewport Select a point inside a viewport bounding box : Select a point inside the correct bounding box The bounding box that surrounds the point will be highlighted and set active. A dialog box showing the settings for that viewport bounding box will be displayed.

2000

See also DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT,DPQ_MSVPRESCALE,DPQ_MVIEW;DPQ_MS VPCREATE

DPQ_SHEETON

Displays the title sheet Title sheets which conform to AutoSYS parameters only will be displayed.
2000

From the View menu, choose Title Visible At the Command prompt, enter dpq_sheeton AutoCAD will regenerate the drawing to display the title sheet. See also DPQ_SHEETOFF Chapter 18 Title blocks and drawing sheets

DPQ_SHEETOFF

283

DPQ_SHEETOFF

Freezes the title sheet layers Title sheets which conform to AutoSYS parameters only will be invisible.
2000

From the View menu, choose Title Invisible At the Command prompt, enter dpq_sheetoff AutoCAD will regenerate the drawing to display the title sheet outline, and hiding the title sheet. See also DPQ_SHEETON Chapter 18 Title blocks and drawing sheets

DPQ_SLOT

Draws slotted holes From the Draw toolbar, choose the Circle flyout then, At the command prompt, enter dpq_slot Center of slot : (or ENTER to Reference from ): Select a point Center length of slot :<0.0000> : Enter a distance Width of slot :<0.0000> : Enter a distance Select angle on screen :<0.0000> : Select a point to establish an angle

2000

DPQ_SNAP0

Sets the snap angle to 0 From the popup menu select SNAP 0 At the command prompt, enter dpq_snap0 The snap angle will be set to 0. See also DPQ_SNAPSET

2000

284

DPQ_SNAPSET

DPQ_SNAPSET

Sets the snap angle a line or polyline segment From the popup menu select SNAP PICK At the command prompt, enter dpq_snapset Select line or polyline : Select either a line or polyline The snap angle will be set to the angle of the line or polyline segment. See also DPQ_SNAP0

2000

DPQ_STATUS

Displays setup information on the current drawing Layout From the Assist menu, choose Inquiry, then AutoSYS Status At the Command prompt, enter dpq_status

2000

See also

DPQ_SWAP

285

DPQ_SWAP

Swaps the position of two sets of objects From the Modify menu, choose Swap From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Swap At the Command prompt, enter dpq_swap Select first group of items : Select objects: Other corner: Use an object selection method Select 1st set base FROM point : Specify a point (1) Select 1st set base FROM point : Specify a point (2) Select second group of items : Select objects: Use an object selection method Select 2st set base FROM point : Specify a point (2) Select 2nd set base TO point : Specify a point (1) See also

2000 [T1-D5]

286

DPQ_SWAP

Blank Page

DPQ_TERMINAL

287

DPQ_TERMINAL

Creates a circle and breaks any lines passing through it The circle can be any diameter, and breaks lines and Polylines.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Circle, then Terminal At the Command prompt, enter dpq_terminal Intersection point : Specify a point Circle Radius :<2> : Enter a number See also

DPQ_TEXT

Creates text at standard heights Text will be created on layers defined by the Text Definition area of the AutoSYS Preferences dialog box.
2000 [T2-H2]

From the Draw menu, choose Text, then a text height From the Draw tablet menu area, choose a text height At the Command prompt, enter dpq_text Text Height 0.18 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.50 0.70 1.00 2.00: <> : Enter an option (command line usage only) Current layer set to 3MT Layer is set as defined by Text Definition Parameters dialog box Justify/Style/<Start point>: Enter an option or specify a point, or press Rotation angle <0.000>: Specify an angle or press Text: Enter characters or press See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXTBOX

288

DPQ_TEXTBOX

DPQ_TEXTBOX

Creates a box around line text A rectangle with any specified offset can be created around any line text. The line text can be part of a block object. The box created around text which is part of a block will not become part of the block. The rectangle is constructed using a polyline with the current pline width, and is drawn on the current layer.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Text, then Text Box At the Command prompt, enter dpq_textbox Offset/<Select text string>: Enter O, or use an object selection method Offset Sets the offset distance from the extents of the text to the rectangle drawn. Text box offset: <0.0> : Enter a number Offset/<Select text string>: Enter O, or use an object selection method Pick text: Use an object selection method, or press See also DPQ_TEXT DPQ_MTEXT

DPQ_TIME Turns record of time spent in a drawing on or off The command acts as a toggle, i.e. if TIME is on it will be turned off, or if it is off it will be turned on.
2000 [T3-I27]

From the Assist menu, choose Inquiry, then Stop Watch From the Inquiry tablet menu area, choose Time At the Command prompt, enter dpq_time See also

DPQ_TOFF

289

DPQ_TOFF

Turns lisp trace off This is used for debugging lisp.

2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_toff See also DPQ_TON

DPQ_TON

Turns lisp trace on This is used for debugging lisp.

2000

At the command prompt, enter dpq_ton See also DPQ_TOFF

DPQ_TRIM

Trims multiple lines at a boundary edges From the Modify menu, choose Multi Trim From the Edit tablet menu area, choose Muti Trim At the Command prompt, enter dpq_trim Select cutting edges... Select objects: Use an object selection method (1) Select objects to trim : Select objects: Use an object selection method (2)(3) Side to trim: Specify a point (4) See also DPQ_EXTEND

2000 [T1-E6]

4 3 1 2

290

DPQ_TXTBRK

DPQ_TXTBRK

Breaks a line of text From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then Break Text At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtbrk Select object: Use an object selection method Characters to break off: <Te> : Enter characters or press The characters you enter must be in the same case as text to break. Text Continue or New location: (Cont New) <Cont> : Enter n or press Continue Places the text below the selected text line, at the line spacing and justification of the original text line. New 1 Place the text at a new position. Text justification is maintained. Pick new location point: Specify a point (1) See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTRPL DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTLOWER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTSRPL DPQ_TXTINSERT DPQ_TXTSCALE DPQ_SETFONT

2000

DPQ_TXTCONT

Creates a new line of text following on from existing text Continues text on a new line. The new line of text has the same features as the text specified to continue from. i.e. same layer, height, justification and style.
2000

From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then Cont Text At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtcont

Pick text to continue: Use an object selection method (1) Text: Enter characters or press L

DPQ_TXTINSERT

291

See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTRPL DPQ_TXTBRK DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTLOWER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTSRPL DPQ_TXTINSERT DPQ_TXTSCALE DPQ_SETFONT

DPQ_TXTINSERT

Reads in text from a text (Ascii) file The current text style and layer is used to format the text.
2000

From the Draw menu, choose Text, then Import Text At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtinsert Insertion point : Specify a point Text justification <L C M R TL TC TR ML MC MR BL BC BR>: <L> : Enter an option or press Rotation angle : <0.0> : Specify an angle See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTRPL DPQ_TXTBRK DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTLOWER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTSRPL DPQ_TXTSCALE DPQ_SETFONT

DPQ_TXTLOWER

Changes an entire line of text to lower case From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then To Lower At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtlower Select object: Use an object selection method See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTRPL DPQ_TXTBRK DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTSRPL DPQ_TXTINSERT DPQ_TXTSCALE DPQ_SETFONT

2000

292

DPQ_TXTRPL

DPQ_TXTRPL

Replace selected text lines with new text Multiple text lines can be selected. If the text is selected one line at a time then you will be prompted to replace the text in the order in which the text was selected, however if a window is used to select multiple lines the order will be random. Text justification, style and layer is not changed.
2000

From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then Pick Replace At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtrpl Select objects: Use an object selection method (1) Enter new text: <> : Enter characters or press See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTBRK DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTLOWER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTSRPL DPQ_TXTINSERT DPQ_TXTSCALE DPQ_SETFONT

DPQ_TXTSCALE

Scales text Normal base point prompt for SCALE command is automatically set to insertion point of text.
2000

From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then Text Scale At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtscale Select objects: Use an object selection method Scale <0.0> : Enter a value, or press See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTRPL DPQ_TXTBRK DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTLOWER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTSRPL DPQ_TXTINSERT DPQ_SETFONT Or use DDEDIT for paragraph text

DPQ_TXTSRPL

293

DPQ_TXTSRPL

Text search and replace Multiple text lines can be selected. Old string characters are case sensitive.
2000

From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then Change Portion At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtsrpl Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter old string: < > : Enter characters e.g. old Enter new string: <> : Enter characters e.g. NEW Changed 1 text lines. See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTBRK DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTLOWER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTRPL DPQ_TXTINSERT DPQ_TXTSCALE DPQ_SETFONT

DPQ_TXTUPPER

Changes an entire line of text to upper case From the Modify menu, choose Edit Text, then To Upper At the Command prompt, enter dpq_txtupper Select object: Use an object selection method See also DPQ_MTEXT DPQ_TEXT DPQ_TXTRPL DPQ_TXTBRK DPQ_TXTUPPER DPQ_TXTLOWER DPQ_TXTCONT DPQ_TXTSRPL DPQ_TXTINSERT DPQ_TXTSCALE DPQ_SETFONT

2000

294

DPQ_TXTUPPER

Blank Page

DPQ_VIEWSET

295

DPQ_VIEWSET

Generates a 3x3 matrix of views At the command prompt, enter dpq_viewset A 3x3 matrix of views numbers A1 through A9 from 0,0 to the maximum limits of the drawing.

2000

DPQ_VPALIGN

Aligns objects in different viewports Make the viewport you want to align the current view port. Turn viewport display on so the viewport borders can be selected. TILEMODE must be set to 0 (off).
2000

From the View menu, choose Layout, then Align Viewport At the Command prompt, enter dpq_vpalign Alignment : Vertical /Horizontal : <Vertical>: Enter h or press Vertical Select Alignment point on model: Specify a point (1) Select view ports to align : Select a viewport (2) Alignment point in this View port (or ENTER to use same point): Specify a point (3), or press Horizontal Select Alignment point on model: Specify a point (1) Select view ports to align : Select a viewport (4) Alignment point in this View port (or ENTER to use same point):

296

DPQ_VPALIGN

Specify a point (5), or press

2 3

4 1

viewport 1

DPQ_WBLOCKALL

297

DPQ_WBLOCKALL

Creates wblocks of all blocks in a drawing All blocks within the drawing, excluding annonymous blocks and xref blocks will be wblocked to the current AutoCAD directory.

2000

From the Construct menu, choose Wblock All At the Command prompt, enter dpq_wblockall Wblocking Displays block name being processed See also DPQ_BLOCK DPQ_WRITEBLOCK

DPQ_WRITEBLOCK

Creates a wblock from a selected block object The selected block will be wblocked to the current AutoCAD directory and will have the same name as the internal block. If your block name is greater than eight characters (DOS file name limit) the Wblock name will be truncated to the first eight characters of the block name. You will be prompted to overwrite an existing Wblock, if one is found with the same name.

2000

From the Construct menu, choose Wblock Select At the Command prompt, enter dpq_writeblock Select BLOCK REFERENCE Use an object selection method See also DPQ_BLOCK DPQ_WBLOCKALL

298

DPQ_WRITEBLOCK

Blank Page

DPQ_ZOOMALL

299

DPQ_ZOOMALL

Zooms to display the entire drawing If used with TILEMODE on the entire drawing will be displayed. If TILEMODE is off, then all viewports may be entirely displayed.
2000

From the View menu, choose Zoom, then All From the Display tablet menu area, choose All At the Command prompt, enter dpq_zoomall TILEMODE 1 (on) Drawing is entirely displayed TILEMODE off Zoom CURRENT Viewport only (Y or N) <Yes> : Enter n or press
n

[T3-P23]

Yes Only the current viewport is zoomed. No All Viewports OK Select view ports to Zoom All: Use an object selection method

See also DPQ_ZOOMXP DPQ_MVIEW

DPQ_ZOOMXP

Zooms viewports to a scale and centrally locates objects DPQ_ZOOMXP scales viewports in paper/model space to be scaled in relation paper space. This ensures all the selected viewports will have the same scale, or for setting up sheets with details on various scales. DPQ_ZOOMXP also centres the objects in the viewport. A ZOOM ALL should be performed on all viewports to be scaled prior to using the DPQ_ZOOMXP command so the objects you have drawn are displayed, and are at the same scale to begin with.
2000

From the Viewport Utilities toolbar, choose From the Display tablet menu area, choose XP

[T3-Q22]

300

DPQ_ZOOMXP

At the Command prompt, enter dpq_zoomxp

Final Paper Scale

Viewport Scale

The Viewport scale is the scale at which this area will be displayed in the final drawing. To select the scale choose from a scale in the pull down, the chosen scale will be displayed in the left hand edit box, Or you can enter the scale manually, in the left edit box.

Object Units
Units

Defines the drawing units used to draw objects in this viewport. If 1 drawing unit is 1 meter then choose METER If 1 drawing unit is 1 millimetre then choose millimetre. This will establish the relationship between the object units and the units the drawing sheets have been defined in the current client definition. Hit OK when done

Scale current view port only (Y or N) <Yes> : Enter n or press Yes Scales the current viewport only No Select View ports to scale : Use an object selection method Center point for this view port : Specify a point

DPQ_ZOOMXP

301

See also DPQ_ZOOMALL DPQ_MVIEW

302

DPQ_ZOOMXP

Blank page

PART 4

CUSTOMISATION REFERENCE

Blank Page

15
AUTOSYS PREFERENCES

AutoSYS has been developed to run independent of any AutoCAD settings. This allows the system supervisor or CAD operator an unlimited amount of scope in how to set up the AutoSYS user and client environment. An unlimited number client/project definitions can be created and these can be simply accessed by selecting from a list. This chapter is an overview of AutoSYSs Preferences dialog box, and how to modify configuration settings. This chapter covers
n n

AutoSYS Preferences overview How to modify configuration settings

Subsequent chapters describe client definitions and individual configuration settings

305

306

Chapter 15

AUTOSYS PREFERENCES

AutoSYS System Environment

AutoSYS can be customised to run either as stand alone system or in a network environment. In a network environment each Workstation can have a different set of available clients and a unique location for their block library files, while still accessing the client definition files maintained by the system supervisor. In a network installation a DPQSUPER.INI file stores a list of User names that can access and modify the Client definition files. This file would be located in a network server directory and security for this file controlled through network privileges.

AutoSYS File Categories

AutoSYS files fall into four categories.
n

Workstation system files. These files are required on the workstation, and specify to AutoSYS the location of other file types. The main control file is autosys.ini. this file is referred to as the SYSTEM file. In a network installation this file would be on the Workstation or user home directory. The Entire Application Loader program is required on the workstation. Program files. These are the ARX and LISP and program files that do all the work. In a network installation these files are placed on a network server. Client definition files. These files define the client settings and plotter output parameters. In a network installation these files are placed on a network server. Library files. These files are the generated block library files. In a network install these files should be located on a network server.

All AutoSYS Customisation is done through the AutoSYS Preferences Dialog.

AutoSYS Preferences

307

AutoSYS Preferences
The AutoSYS Preferences dialog box provides access to all of AutoSYSs internal configuration settings, as well as utilities to create and edit client definition files. To display the AutoSYS Preferences dialog box
n

From the Options menu choose Preferences...,then AutoSYS Preferences...

308

Chapter 15

AUTOSYS PREFERENCES

System
Specifies general global system configuration settings, see Chapter 3, System Preferences.

Plotter Options
Controls plotting parameters, see Chapter 5, Plotting Preferences.

Client/Section Setup
Create new and modify existing client settings, see Chapter 4, Client Definition Preferences. Client Name SetupThis section displays the list of the clients already defined in AutoSYS. The buttons allow you to add New clients, Change or Delete Existing clients.
Layer Control

Customise layer names, colors, linetypes, etc. for the selected client name. Customise dimension style values for Linear, Limits and Tolerance dimensions for the selected client name. Customise text heights etc. for the selected client name. Customise settings for drawing sheets, and associated elements of the drawing sheet, such as title blocks, revision blocks, material lists etc. Settings are saved for the selected client name. system settings and scales which can be set for each client name. Provides a shortcut method for editing and defining new client definitions. This allows you to quickly create a new client or edit an existing client for Layer structure, Drawing Sheets, Text and Dimension structure. A full Customisation will require the use of the other full editing tools as shown above.

Dimensions

Text Definition Drawing Sheets

System Variables / Customise Scales

Client Snapshot / Build / Edit

Making Modifications to Preferences

309

Making Modifications to Preferences

All the preference settings are saved in initialisation (.ini) files. When AutoSYS is loaded it uses the information in the ini files to setup different parameters for the editing session. By modifying AutoSYS preferences you are able to customise AutoSYS for your specific drawing requirements. See Chapters 3 through 6 for detailed information on preference settings. AutoSYSs preferences can be edited using the dialog box editors supplied in AutoSYS, or if you prefer, they can be edited using any text editor.

Common Dialog Boxes

A number of dialog boxes are used when modifying preferences. Their function and how to use them are described below. Section Selector Each ini file has a number of preference settings relating to a particular function, or process. Within each ini file the settings are grouped together under section headings to make them easier to read, and to modify. The AutoSYS INI File Editor dialog box enables you to edit a specific section of an ini file.

FileName

Indicates the ini file to be edited.

Section Header ListDisplays

the section headings which can be selected to modify. Choose a section heading to modify.
309

310

Chapter 15

AUTOSYS PREFERENCES

Current section

Displays the section heading selected in the section list box. Displays the AutoSYS Configure dialog box, which enables you to modify preferences relevant to the section heading selected. Aborts the dialog box. If changes have been made to any preferences they wont be saved. Any changes made to preference settings in the AutoSYS Configure dialog box will be saved to the ini file indicated by the file name at the top of the dialog box, and the AutoSYS INI File Editor dialog box will be closed.

Edit Button

Cancel

Save

Preference Editor Preference settings are changed using the AutoSYS Configure dialog box. This dialog box displays and enables you to edit preferences in one section heading of an ini file at a time. If you would rather see the whole ini file while you edit preferences, you will have to open the ini file using some other editor, e.g. using

File

Section Header Name

Key Name Edit

Key Name Setting Edit

Windows NOTEPAD. File Name Indicates the ini file being edited.
Section Header Name

Indicates the section header which relates to the preferences being edited.

Making Modifications to Preferences

311

Key Names List Box

Displays the preferences which can be modified. If more preferences than those displayed in the list box are available, a slider on the right hand side of the list box can be used to page down the list. Choose the preference you wish to modify, it will become hi-lighted. Displays the key name (text to the left of the = sign on the line selected in the key name list box). The key name cannot be renamed, and for AutoSYS to function correctly existing key names should not be deleted. Enter preference setting Choose this button to enter a new key name. When selected any value in the key name edit box will be blanked out, and you will be able to enter a new key name in the key name edit box. Note: If you have selected a key name from the list of key names the New button will have to be selected twice before you can enter a value in the key name edit box. 1. Choose the New Button. 2. Choose the Key Name edit box. 3. Enter a new key name. Removes the selected key name line from the Key Name list box. 1. Select a key name from the Key Name List box. 2. Choose the Delete button Updates the Key Name list box with the values in the Key Name edit box and Key Name Setting edit box. If a new key name is being entered, the new key name and its setting will be added below the last line in the Key Name list box. If a Key Name Setting is being changed for an existing Key Name the old setting will be updated in the Key Name List box. Changes the Key Name Setting of the selected preference to either On or Off, depending on its current value. i.e. If the value is On it will change it to Off.

Key Name

Key Name Setting Edit Box New Button

Delete Button

Update Button

On/Off

311

312

Chapter 15

AUTOSYS PREFERENCES

Browse

Displays the Select File dialog box. This enables you to search the directory structure and select a directory as a value for a Key Name. Closes the dialog box. If changes have been made to any preferences they wont be saved. Closes the dialog box

Cancel

OK

16
SYSTEM PREFERENCES

This chapter lists AutoSYSs system preferences, their function, and default values.

313

314

Chapter 16

SYSTEM PREFERENCES

System Preferences
The settings that establish the method in which a user on a workstation, running AutoSYS, interacts with AutoCAD is stored in file named autosys.ini. These settings are referred to as the AutoSYS system preferences. As this file describes the way in which a particular user is setup to run AutoSYS, in a network installation this file would be stored either on the workstation or in the users home directory. In a stand alone installation this file would be stored with the AutoSYS program files. The autosys.ini file contains settings that describe :
n

How AutoSYS will load and where to locate the program files, the menu to use and how the menus will be displayed. This is The Application Loader [Load] interface section. How AutoSYS will unload. This is The Application Loader [UnLoad] interface section. Workstation system parameters. Client lists and client codes. Plotter interface parameters. User program interface parameters. Redefined Command list. Block library definitions.

n n n n n n

The Load and Unload section of this file should be edited using The Application Loader DPQ_LOADERPREF command. The System, User interface and default settings are modified by selecting the appropriate button from the System section of the AutoSYS Preferences Dialog box.

System Settings

The preference settings under System Settings govern the way AutoSYS interacts with the user and AutoCAD.

System Settings

315

File: autosys.ini

[System]
System Preferences Preferences Baseappname Characteristics Type: String Default value: AutoSYS 2000 Type: String Default: STD Type: String Default: ID obtained from Installation Description Main application name used to define base system Sets the default client designation when creating new drawings. Sets the default name for the Drawn By entry in the title sheet. This must be Upper case. For Network installations this name must match the settings in the DPQSUPER.INI if this user is allowed to modify client definition files Controls support for drawings opened which have been created using AutoSYS Lite. On AutoSYS Lite drawing files supported. Off AutoSYS Lite drawing files not supported. Controls the execution of additional user start-up & exiting files. References the USERHANDLES section (p20). On User files executed. Off No user files are executed. Controls AutoCAD command redefinition. See p22 for details. On Redefines AutoCAD commands in [Redefined] section of ini file. Off AutoCAD commands are not redefined.

Defaultclient Dpqname

Lite

Type: Switch Default: Off

Userhandle

Type: Switch Default: Off

Redefined

Type: Switch Default: On

316

Chapter 16

SYSTEM PREFERENCES

Preferences Dpqbypass

Characteristics Type: Switch Default: Off

Description Controls the execution of AutoSYS on start-up. (Not Used in 7.5) On AutoSYS is loaded. Off AutoSYS is not loaded. Controls the display of trace messages to track program execution. On Trace messages displayed. Off No trace messages displayed. Internal use. On Bypasses normal start-up and runs a system file Off Normal execution of start-up routine Controls the display of additional information, such as drawing scale, current text style etc. on the status line. On Displays additional status line information. The information displayed is controlled by the contents of the file dpqmacro.lsp. Information displayed on the status line is written in AutoCADs Diesel command language. This file is supplied Unencrypted and can be modified. Off AutoCADs default status line. Controls the display of load times at start-up. On Display all load times. Off Display total time to load only. Controls the display of the AutoSYS save to floppy disk dialog box when exiting from a drawing. On Dialog box displayed. Off Dialog box not displayed.

Dpqtrace

Type: Switch Default: Off

Clientcheck

Type: Switch Default: Off

Modemacro

Type: Switch Default: Off

Timedisplay

Type: Switch Default: Off

Savebox

Type: Switch Default: On

System Settings

317

Preferences Viewsave

Characteristics Type: Switch Default: Off

Description Controls the creation of predefined views of the drawing. On Nine views of the drawing are created using a 3x3 grid. The dpq_mainsheet view of the whole drawing is also created. Off The dpq_mainsheet view is only created. Not Used in Version 8.0 for AutoSYS 2000 Sets the directory where AutoSYS will write the drawing change note information associated with the drawing revision function. Specified where the revision data will ne written. DataBase Uses external database program File Off Writes to a CDF file Does nothing

STD Dcnlocation

Type: String Default: Standard Type: Directory Default: c:\xplot

Database

Type: Switch Default: Off

Baseclient

Type: String Default: STD Type: String Default: notepad Type: Switch Default: On

Sets the CLIENT name definition files to use if a specific client definition file cannot be found. Sets the editor program to use for the DPQ_EDITOR command Sets how AutoSYS will update drawings that have missing or non conforming parameters. On Updates Automatically. Off Prompts User to update. Specifies the location of the AutoCAD LT control ACLT.INI file, used for compatibility with AutoSYS Lite. On Signon dialog appears in UNNAMED dwgs. Off No Signon dialog appears.

Editor Autoupdate

acltwinini

Type: Directory Default: Type: Switch Default: Off

Signon

318

Chapter 16

SYSTEM PREFERENCES

Preferences LibraryDir

Characteristics Type: Switch Default: ...\dpq_v7\library Type: Switch Default: ..\dpq_v7\block Type Directory Default ..\dpq_v7

Description Specifies the directory where the AutoSYS Library files (.LIB) and Slide libraries (.SLB) are stored. Specifies the parent directory where the AutoSYS block library drawing files are stored (.DWG). Product specific sub directories can be under this directory. Specifies the location for user defined scripts used for batch operations. If this parameter is missing the standard AutoSYS path will be searched. Specifies whether AutoSYS will display the new drawing setup dialog when entering unnamed drawings or drawing with the name drawing.dwg. If this switch is On the Display new dialog on start-up should be turned off in AutoCAD preferences On The drawing setup dialog will only display after the NEW command is executed. AutoSYS will not load when AutoCAD starts up Off The drawing setup dialog will display on entry into AutoCAD as well as after executing the NEW command.

ProductDir

UserScriptDir

UnnamedDialog

Type Switch Default Off

Formatdefault

Type : String Default : Model

Specifies the default drawing format to use when creating new drawings.This can be system based or client based. If Formatdefault is not specified then Model format will be used. Paper Specifies Paper/Model format Model Specifies Model Format BYCLIENT Uses the Formatdefault specified in the client SY.INI file

User Interface

319

Preferences Initialmode

Characteristics Type : String Default : Lastview

Description Specifies the view to display when editing existing drawings PAPER Specifed paper space MODEL Specifies Model Space Lastview Spcifies the last saved view

HelpEditor

Type : File path

Specifies the fully qualified filesname and path to the adobe acrobat reader for viewing the help files.

User Interface
The preference settings under User Interface govern the way AutoSYS will execute user files loaded in conjunction with AutoSYS. During the course of using AutoCAD and AutoSYS you may wish to execute your own programs. E.g.: You may have a requirement to produce a Transmittal note after you do a plot, or you may need to add data to a database whenever you start a drawing. AutoSYS provides a link into the program to do these tasks. This link is through the USERHANDLE mechanism. Currently, AutoSYS provides 3 links at each of the following events.
n n n n

When a drawing is opened for editing When a drawing is ended Before Plotting After plotting

To link your programs to the events add the program name to the appropriate userhandle name. The type of program will define the way the file name is entered into the INI file.
n n

LISP Enter just the file name ADS Prefix the file name with an X I.e.: MYFILE.EXE would be XMYFILE ARX Prefix the file name with an R I.e.: MYFILE.ARX would be RMYFILE

The userhandle mechanism will use the AutoSYS search path to locate the file, so the files must be placed in a directory that is on the AutoSYS path. Or the directory can be added to the Apppath= line in the autosys.ini file [Load] Section. File: autosys.ini
319

320

Chapter 16

SYSTEM PREFERENCES

[Userhandles]
User interface preferences Preferences dpqhandle0 dpqhandle1 dpqhandle2 dpqhandle3 dpqhandle11 dpqhandle12 dpqhandle13 dpqhandle21 dpqhandle22 dpqhandle23 dpqhandle31 dpqhandle32 dpqhandle33 Characteristics Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Type: String Default: Description Internal use only Executed when a drawing is opened Executed when a drawing is opened Executed when a drawing is opened Executed when a drawing is ended Executed when a drawing is ended Executed when a drawing is ended Executed before performing an AutoSYS plot Executed before performing an AutoSYS plot Executed before performing an AutoSYS plot Executed after performing an AutoSYS plot Executed after performing an AutoSYS plot Executed after performing an AutoSYS plot

Default Settings

321

Default Settings
During its operation, AutoSYS will check the validity of various sections of the client definition files. This is a safety net in case operators change a definition file in some way that may cause AutoSYS to complain. Only those items determined to be critical to the correct operation of AutoSYS are checked. When each definition file section is used the items are compared with the appropriate section in the dpqdeflt.ini file. No check is made on dpqdeflt.ini, so leave it alone unless you are confident that the changes made will be OK. File: dpqdeflt.ini

Redefined Commands
AutoSYS provides a number of tools that ensure all objects are drawn on correct layers. I.e.: Text goes onto defined text layers, dimensions are placed on the correct dimensioning layer etc. Whenever an AutoCAD Draw or Dimensioning command is executed, AutoSYS checks to make sure that the current layer is appropriate for the command change to the correct layer if it is not. To do this AutoSYS uses AutoCAD reators to intercept comandsing sure those command behave in accordance with the client settings . Only those commands listed will be intercepted. Toaccess the autocad native command without being trapped remove the command name from the Redefined list. Additional commands can be added if you wish to redefine and create your own versions of AutoCAD commands, however there is no check made on the validity of the command names, and incorrect names may cause unexpected results. So BE CAREFUL. As this task is not one we wish to encourage, there is no direct interface to this section of the autosys.ini file. Any editing will need to be done with your own editor, I.e.: Notepad. File: autosys.ini

[Redefined]
Redefined Commands Preferences Draw Characteristics Description Type: Semicolon List of AutoCAD 2000 Draw Commands delimited String intercepted by a reactor in AutoSYS

321

322

Chapter 16

SYSTEM PREFERENCES

Preferences Dimension

Characteristics Type: Semicolon delimited String Type: Semicolon delimited String

Description List of AutoCAD 2000 Dimension Commands intercepted by a reator in AutoSYS List of AutoCAD Commands intercepted by a reactor in AutoSYS. Zoom is set here to control the zooming in model space viewports. Controls whether AutoSYS will redefine the Tilemode toggle to control LTSCALE and PSLTSCALE for Paper and model space. On AutoSYS will set: Paper Space LTSCALE (client LTSCALE) PSLTSCALE 1 Model Space LTSCALE (client LTSCALE x scale) PSLTSCALE 0 Off Normal AutoCAD

OtherCommands

Tilemode

Type: Switch On or Off

Drawing Units
AutoCAD allows you to draw in any units whether it be Inches, Millimetres, Metres, Feet or any other unit that takes your fancy, but generally only unit type can be used in any one drawing file. AutoSYS however allows for any number of different units to be defined in the one drawing and correctly plot out. The Units honoured are specified in the Units section of the autosys.ini file. You can add other units to this section. The Base unit is specified first and set to 1.0 all other units are then specified with the appropriate scale from the base unit. The table below shows the values set in AutoSYS as it is supplied out of the box. Unit Name Millimetres Meter Inches Feet Multiplier 1.0 1000 25.4 304.8

17
CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

A drawing quality system is the adoption of a standard code of practice in two areas:
n n

Hard copy Electronic naming practices for layers, text, and drawing sheets etc.

In most cases, every company using AutoCAD to produce engineering drawing establishes a different system of layers and other electronic standards. AutoSYS is designed to allow any number of different client definitions to be stored on a workstation or network server. This chapter describes how AutoSYS manages client definition parameters and how to create new clients using both the Quick Client program and editing the definition files interactively.

323

324

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

The AutoSYS Client Profile System

When drawings were produced by hand, (that is before CAD) and we changed from one project to another, there was no major change to the way drawings were produced. As drawing, was simply a matter of using a pen to draw lines on paper. The hardest part was selecting the correct pre-printed sheet. With CAD (and the many and varied layer and tablet structures), changing from one client or project to another usually means an entire concept change in the way you interact with AutoCAD. The AutoSYS client profile system eliminates this concept change. Each client defined in AutoSYS is allocated a unique 3-5 character client code. A set of client definition files is associated with this code and these files are used to store the CAD standards required for each client. When its time to go onto another project, the CAD standards defined for that project can be quickly established within AutoSYS. The basic user interface does not change, but once that client is selected (when creating a new drawing) all objects will now be produced in accordance with the new clients CAD standard. An unlimited number of Clients can be built into AutoSYS and called back at any time. Once a client definition has been created, it never has to be redone. This means you can have any number of workstations, producing different types of drawings, using different applications all on a common interface to ANY established CAD standard system, controlled, either at an administrator or workstation level. AutoSYS stores the list of clients and the associated client definition code in the AutoSYS system file, autosys.ini. Where the AutoSYS system file and the client definition files are stored depends on the type of installation you are running. In a stand alone installation both the system file and the client definition files a located on the workstation. In a network installation the system file will always be located either on the workstation or in the users home directory. While all client definition files are stored on a network server. This allows each user to have his own client list with the client definitions being stored, accessed and managed from the network server. In a secure network installation the directory that stores the client definition files should be marked as Read Only for users and Read Write for the system manager. In a network environment AutoSYS provides a Superuser file that stores the ID codes of all users who are allowed to modify client definition files. This file dpqsuper.ini is located with the client definition files, on the network server. If a user, uses an AutoSYS command that requires modification of a client definition file, that users ID is checked against the list stored in the dpqsuper.ini

The AutoSYS Client Profile System

325

file, if the name matches then access is allowed, if not then the user is issued an alert and the process is aborted.

Client Definition Files

When you define a client in AutoSYS you must allocate it a 3 character Client Code. The entire client system in AutoSYS is based on the Client Code. The client name / Client Code association is stored in the [Client Name] section of the autosys.ini (system) file. Each AutoSYS client has 5 client definition files associated with it. The naming convention used for these files is DPQ[3chr client code][2 chr definition file identifier].ini DP[4chr client code][2 chr definition file identifier].ini D[5chr client code][2 chr definition file identifier].ini The file identifiers are,
n n n

LA, E.g.. dpqstdla.ini, stores the Layer mapping parameters. TX, E.g.. dpqstdtx.ini, stores Text definition parameters. SY, E.g.. dpqstdsy.ini, stores the system variable settings, drawing parameters and prototype drawings required. DM, E.g.. dpqstddm.ini, stores the Dimension style settings. SH, E.g.. dpqstdsh.ini, stores the drawing sheet definitions. The preference editor for this file type is explained later in this chapter.

n n

AutoSYS does not require a unique set of definition files to be created for each client. A fall back file searching system allows for a basic set of files to be created. This file set is then associated with the Baseclient preference setting in the AutoSYS system file. Then only specific client files are created for those things that differ from the base client. A Baseclient can be associated with individual clients or a general Baseclient can be specified. Both settings are located in the Autosys.ini file When a new drawing is created or an existing drawing is edited, AutoSYS will search for the definition files associated with the client. The search order is as follows, using the AutoSYS search path.
n

A search if made using the naming convention described earlier for the current selected client. I.e.. If the client code is MIK, a search is made for dpqmik??.ini If the client chosen has an entry included in the [Client Default] section of the autosys.ini file A search if made using the naming convention, for the client associated with the client chosen I.e.. If the client chosen is

326

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

ADA and the [Client Default]has an entry ADA=GEN, a search is made for dpqgen??.ini
n

A search if made using the naming convention, for the Base client as defined in the Baseclient setting in the [System] section of autosys.ini. I.e.. If the Baseclient code is GEN, a search is made for dpqgen??.ini A search if made using the naming convention for the STD client (The client supplied with AutoSYS).I.e.. a search is made for dpqstd??.ini

If all the searches fail, AutoSYS will report an error. This type of error is a major one, it means AutoSYS does not have enough files to function correctly. AutoSYS may need to be reinstalled.

The Super User File

In a network environment AutoSYS provides a Superuser file that stores the ID codes of all users who are allowed to modify client definition files. This file dpqsuper.ini is located with the client definition files, on the network server. When a user runs an AutoSYS command that requires the modification of a client definition file, AutoSYS searches for the dpqsuper.ini file using the AutoSYS search path, if found that users ID is obtained from the Dwgname setting in the [System] section of autosys.ini. This name is checked against the list stored in the dpqsuper.ini file, if the name matches (or the dpqsuper.ini file is not found) then access is allowed, if not then the user is issued an alert. and the process is aborted.

Editing the List of Clients

AutoSYS stores the list of clients and their associated client definition codes in the AutoSYS system file, autosys.ini. This file will always be located either on the workstation or in the users home directory (if running a network version). This allows each user to have his own client list with the client definitions being stored, accessed and managed from the network server. To add a new client Adding a client will only add the client name and client code association to the [Client Name] section of the AutoSYS system file. Creating and editing the client definition files is explained later in this chapter.

Editing the List of Clients

327

1 From AutoSYS Preferences, Client Name Setup area, clear the Client Code edit box.

2 Enter the 3 character client code for the new client in Client Code Edit box. 3 From the Client Name Setup area, clear the Client Name edit box. 4 Enter the client name for the new client in the Client Name Edit box. 5 Choose New. AutoSYS will now search for the client definition files associated with the client and display the file names against each client definition file section. As this is a new client these files may not be found therefore AutoSYS will use the file search method explained earlier to display either the Base client files or the STD client file. 6 To save the changes to the autosys.ini file, Choose the Save to INI button. To change an existing client name 1 From the Client Name Setup list box select the client you wish to change. 2 Enter the new name in the Client Name Edit box. 3 Choose the Change Button. 4 To save the changes to the autosys.ini file, Choose the Save to INI button. To delete an existing client Deleting a client will only remove the client from the AutoSYS system file. It will not delete the client definition files associated with the particular client.

328

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

1 From the Client Name Setup list box select the client you wish to delete. 2 Choose the Delete button. 3 To save the changes to the autosys.ini file, Choose the Save to INI button

Editing Definition Files

With the exception of drawing sheet parameters, all definition files are edited using the same method. The editing method for drawing sheet parameters is explained with the drawing sheet preferences later in this chapter. To edit definition files 1 From the Client Name Setup list box choose the client name.

AutoSYS will search for the definition files associated with that client and display the .INI file name found for each section. If the correct client code definition file is found the EDIT button will be enabled. If the fall back file is located then the Edit button will be disabled and the Build button will be activated. If Build is selected a new client definition file will be created based on the file indicated, the EDIT button will then be enabled.

Editing Definition Files

329

2 Choose Edit from the appropriate section. This will display the Section Selector Dialog. See chapter 2 for an explanation of this dialog. 3 From this dialog Choose the section of the definition file to edit. This will display the Preference editor Dialog. See chapter 2 for an explanation of this dialog. 4 Make the changes as required, then choose OK. You will be returned to the Section Selector dialog. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all changes are made. 5 When finished choose Save.

329

330

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Layer Definition File

The Layer definition file stores the layering system to be adopted by the client. When selecting pens in AutoCAD, AutoSYS establishes the correct layer to use by interrogating this file. File: dpq[3chr client code]la.ini

[LayerSystem]
Layer system preferences determines basic layer system parameters Layer system settings Preferences Layerassoc Characteristics Type: Switch Default: Off Description Controls whether Secondary layers are associated with main layers. On Secondary layers are associated. Off Secondary layers are not associated. Controls whether main and secondary layers names are attached to dimension layers. On Uses enhanced layering. Off Does not use enhanced layering. Controls whether layers are mapped directly to pens or the full layer build is used. On Uses direct mapping. Off Does not use direct mapping.

Dimextended

Type: Switch Default: Off

Layerdirectmap

Type: Switch Default: Off

Thickpen

Type: String Pen thickness for thick lines Default value: 0.50 Type: String Pen thickness for medium lines Default value: 0.35 Type: String Pen thickness for thin lines Default value: 0.25 Type: String Pen thickness for Dashed lines Default value: 0.25

Mediumpen

Thinpen

Dashpen

Layer Definition File

331

Preferences Chainpen

Characteristics

Description

Type: String Pen thickness for Chain lines Default value: 0.25 Type: String Pen thickness for double dashed lines Default value: 0.25 Type: Switch Default: On Controls whether the default layers are created automatically. On Creates default layers. Off Does not create default layers. Controls whether AutoSYS identifies layer 0 as a reserved layer. On Off Allows drawing in layer 0 Does not allow drawing in layer 0

Doubledashpen

Defaultlayer

Allow0

Type: Switch Default value: Off

Clipvportdimlayer Type: Switch Default value: Off

Controls whether AutoSYS generates a unique layer for dimensions created in model space viewports. On Generates a unique dimension layer for each viewport containing dimensions. Off Does not generate unique dimension layers for viewports.

[Dimension]
Dimension layer settings control the color of dimension lines and text. Values specified here will take precedence over any color settings in the dimension definition file or the layer color specified for dimensions in the [Objectlayer] section of this file. The AutoSYS dimension styles in the drawing will be updated to reflect the settings specified here, each time the drawing is edited. Dimension color settings Preferences Dimclrt Characteristics Type: String Default value: Description Specifies the color for dimension text. This is checked each time the drawing is opened.

331

332

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Preferences Dimclre

Characteristics Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value:

Description Specifies the color for dimension extension lines. This is checked each time the drawing is opened. Specifies the color for dimension lines. This is checked each time the drawing is opened.

Dimclrd

[LayerOrder]
This section describes how AutoSYS will build the layer names when a particular pen / linetype is selected If Layerdirectmap is turned off, layers are constructed based on the structure specified by the Layerorder setting. The layer name is split into 4 components, Main, Secondary, Pen and Linetype. Each component is allocated a number of characters. The order in which the name is build depends on the order and number associated in the Layerorder setting. Whether a section of the layer is always used is defined using the subsection descriptor. The descriptor keywords are,
n n n

A N

Indicates this section must always be used. Indicates this section need not be present.

_M Indicates if the Main layer section is present then this section must also be present. If not, then that section will be padded out with underscores. _S Indicates if the Secondary layer section is present then this section must also be present. If not, then that section will be padded out with underscores.

If Layerdirectmap is turned On, layers are constructed based on the structure specified by the Layerorder setting for main and secondary layers with the Pen/Linetype map specified in the Layerdirectmap section of this file added to the end of the layer name. It is important to note, that when using directly mapped layers, the layer structure must be specified with the pen and linetype set at the end.

Layer Definition File

333

Layer name build order settings Preferences Characteristics Layerorder Description Type: Comma delimited String Specifies how the layer name is Default value: M4,S3,P1,L2 constructed. The order and number of characters used for each section. Type: Comma delimited String Controls if and how the Main layer Default value: M section is used. Type: Comma delimited String Controls if and how the Secondary Default value: N,_M layer section is used. Type: Comma delimited String Controls if and how the Pen layer Default value: A section is used. Type: Comma delimited String Controls if and how the Linetype layer Default value: A section is used.

M S P L

[Defaultlayer]
The default layer settings determine what AutoSYS uses as the default layer names when first entering a drawing. Default layer name settings Preferences Main Secondary Pen Linetype UserM1 Characteristics Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: 0.25 Type: String Default value: CO Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Description Specifies the default main layer name. Specifies the default secondary layer name. Specifies the default pen thickness. Specifies the default linetype. Specifies the 1st preferred main layer name. This is called from position 1 of the main layer toolbar. Specifies the 2nd preferred main layer name. This is called from position 2 of the main layer toolbar.

UserM2

333

334

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Preferences UserM3

Characteristics Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value:

Description Specifies the 3rd preferred main layer name. This is called from position 3 of the main layer toolbar. Specifies the 4th preferred main layer name. This is called from position 4 of the main layer toolbar. Specifies the 5th preferred main layer name. This is called from position 5 of the main layer toolbar. Specifies the 1st preferred secondary layer name. This is called from position 1 of the secondary layer toolbar. Specifies the 2nd preferred secondary layer name. This is called from position 2 of the secondary layer toolbar. Specifies the 3rd preferred secondary layer name. This is called from position 3 of the secondary layer toolbar. Specifies the 4th preferred secondary layer name. This is called from position 4 of the secondary layer toolbar. Specifies the 5th preferred secondary layer name. This is called from position 5 of the secondary layer toolbar.

UserM4

UserM5

UserS1

UserS2

UserS3

UserS4

UserS5

[MainLayer]
This section lists the names and descriptions for the main layer section of the layer name. The left hand portion is the actual name used when building a layer name. The right hand portion is the Description to display in dialog boxes. If Layerassociation is On then the secondary layer names (the actual layer name) associated with this particular main layer can be added, each separated by a semicolon or a comma. The format for this section is Actual Layer name=Layer description;secondary layer;secondary layer Eg.BEAM=Beam Members;B1;B2;B3 When Beam Members is selected from a dialog the layer would be built using

Layer Definition File

335

the name BEAM. If Layerassociation in On, only the B1, B2, B3 secondary layer descriptions would be available for selection.

[SecondaryLayer]
This section lists the names and descriptions for the secondary layer section of the layer name. The left hand portion is the actual name used when building a layer name. The right hand portion is the Description to display in dialog boxes. If Layerassociation in On the left hand name can be added to the MainLayer section to associate secondary layer names with a main layer. See the MainLayer section. The format for this section is, Actual Layer name=Layer description E.g.. B1=Beam type1 When Beam Type 1 is selected from a dialog the layer would be built using B1 as the secondary layer name.

[PenSize]
If Layerdirectmap is Off this section is used to establish the available pen sizes, layer name and color for the pen portion of the layer name. The format for this section is, Pen thickness=Layer name;color number

[LayerFunction]
This section is used to establish the linetype to be used. Additional codes can be added if required. However the basic set must be present as shown in the table, for AutoSYS to function correctly. Other line types can be substituted for those specified here or additional linetypes added. The format for this section is, Linetype Descriptor=Layer name to use;Description;Linetype;LType file Layer linetype settings Code Default Value CO HD DH CO;Continuous;cont;acad HD;Hidden;dpqdash_1dpq1100 DH;Dashed;dpqdash_2;dpq1100 Description Continuous Outlines, Hatch, Short center lines. Small dashed lines, Hidden outlines Long dashed lines, Hidden outlines
335

336

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Code Default Value PH CS CM CL DD PH;Phantom;dpqphantom,dpq1100 CS;Short Center;dpqchain_1;dpq1100 CM;Medium Center;dpqchain_2;dpq1100 CL;Long Center;dpqchain_3;dpq1100 DD;Double Dash;dpqchdbdash;dpq1100

Description Dashed dot lines, Outlines of adjacent parts Center chain lines, Short Center chain lines, Medium Center chain lines, Long Double Dashed lines,

[Layermaplist]
This section is used to establish direct layer mapping for pen thickness and linetypes. Layerdirectmap must be On for this section to be used. The format for this section is, [Pen thickness][Linetype Code]=Layer name to use; color number The Pen Thickness and Linetype codes must match a code already defined in the Layerfunction and Pensize sections of the definition file. Do not delete unmapped names. Layer mapping settings Map name 0.18CO 0.25CO 0.35CO 0.50CO 0.70CO 1.00CO 2.00CO 0.18HD 0.25HD 0.35HD 0.50HD 0.70HD 0.18DH Description 0.18 Continuous line 0.25 Continuous line 0.35 Continuous line 0.50 Continuous line 0.70 Continuous line 1.0 Continuous line 2.0 Continuous line 0.18 Short dashed line 0.25 Short dashed line 0.35 Short dashed line 0.50 Short dashed line 0.70 Short dashed line 0.18 Long dashed line

Layer Definition File

337

Map name 0.25DH 0.35DH 0.50DH 0.70DH 0.18PH 0.25PH 0.35PH 0.50PH 0.70PH 0.18CS 0.25CS 0.35CS 0.18CM 0.25CM 0.35CM 0.18CL 0.25CL 0.35CL 0.18DD 0.25DD 0.35DD 0.50DD 0.70DD

Description 0.25 Long dashed line 0.35 Long dashed line 0.50 Long dashed line 0.70 Long dashed line 0.18 Phantom (Dash Dot) line 0.25 Phantom (Dash Dot) line 0.35 Phantom (Dash Dot) line 0.50 Phantom (Dash Dot) line 0.70 Phantom (Dash Dot) line 0.18 Short center line 0.25 Short center line 0.35 Short center line 0.18 Medium center line 0.25 Medium center line 0.35 Medium center line 0.18 Long center line 0.25 Long center line 0.35 Long center line 0.18 Double Dashed line 0.25 Double Dashed line 0.35 Double Dashed line 0.50 Double Dashed line 0.70 Double Dashed line

[ModelText]
This section is used to establish the layer used for each text height generated in Model space or model space viewports. Additional values can be entered if required. However the basic set must be present as shown in the table, for AutoSYS to function correctly. The format for this section is, [Text height]Text=Layer name to use;Linetype;Color number The Linetype code must match a code already defined in the Layerfunction section
337

338

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Model space text layer settings Height 1.8Text 2.5Text 3.5Text 5.0Text 7.5Text Default 1MT;CO;1 2MT;CO;2 3MT;CO;2 5MT;CO;6 7MT;CO;5 Description 1.8 high text 2.5 high text 3.5 high text 5.0 high text 7.5 high text

[PaperText]
This section is used to establish the layer used for each text height generated in Paper space. Additional values can be entered if required. However the basic set must be present as shown in the table, for AutoSYS to function correctly. The format for this section is, [Text height]Text=Layer name to use;Linetype;Color number The Linetype code must match a code already defined in the Layerfunction section Paper Text layer settings Height 1.8Text 2.5Text 3.5Text 5.0Text 7.5Text Default 1PT;CO;1 2PT;CO;2 3PT;CO;2 5PT;CO;6 7PT;CO;5 Description 1.8 high text 2.5 high text 3.5 high text 5.0 high text 7.5 high text

[Objectlayer]
This section is used to establish the layer used for various object used in AutoSYS. The format for this section is, Object name=Layer name to use;Linetype;Color number The Linetype code must match a code already defined in the Layerfunction section

Layer Definition File

339

Object layer settings Preferences Titlesheet Materiallist Revisionlist Blocks Dimension Characteristics Type: String Default value: 5CT;CO;6 Type: String Default value: 3ML;CO;2 Type: String Default value: 3RL;CO;2 Type: String Default value: 3BL;CO;2 Type: String Default value: DPQ_DIM;CO;12 Type: String Default value: DPQ_MODELPORT;CO;8 Type: String Default value: 5CO;CO;6 Type: String Default value: 5CO;CO;6 Type: String Default value: 2CO,CO,7 Type: String Default value: 3CO,CO,2 Type: StringDefault value:5CO,CO,6 Type: String Default value: 2HT,CO,2 Type: String Default value: 2RL,CO,2 Description Specifies the layer name linetype and color used to insert Title sheets Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Material lists Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Revision lists Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Blocks generally Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Dimensions Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for View ports Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Section lines Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Section balloons Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Grid lines Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Grid balloons Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for block inserted using the library manager Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for Hatching Specifies the layer name linetype and color used for revision clouds

Modelport

Sectionline Sectionballoon Gridlinelayer Gridballoonlayer SymbolLayer

Hatching Cloud

339

340

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Text Definition File

The Text definition file stores the text system to be adopted by the client. When selecting text heights in AutoCAD, AutoSYS establishes the correct text style to use by interrogating this file. File: dpq[3chr client code]tx.ini

[TextSystem]
When creating a new drawing or rescaling an existing drawing, AutoSYS will establish a text structure based on information contained in this file. Styles will be created from scratch or existing ones modified to match the text parameters specified. Text system settings Preferences Extended Characteristics Type: String Default value: On Description Specifies if text layers will use the enhanced layering system. On Uses enhanced layering. Off Does not use enhanced layering.

Defaultheight Fontdir

Type: String Specifies the default text height. Default value: 2.5 Type: String Default value: Identifies the directory where fonts are located. No entry here will cause AutoSYS to search the AutoCAD path for fonts.

Fontwidth Fontstyle

Type: String Specifies the width factor for text. Default value: 1.0 Type: String Default value: Fixed Specifies the text format to use Fixed or Dynamic. Fixed Uses a different text style for each text height Dynamic Uses one text style for all text heights (0 height font) Specifies the font file name to use for all text.

Fontname

Type: String Default value: ISO3098B

Text Definition File

341

[Alternate Fonts]
This section defines the alternate fonts to be used. These styles will be generated as either Dynamic or Fixed fonts depending on the setting of Fontstyle in the [TextSystem] section. If Fixed fonts styles are to be created then the style name will be made up of the Style name prefix specified in this sections plus the standard name specified in the [ModelSpace] and [PaperSpace] sections. Dynamic text style names will be made up using the Style name prefix specified in this section plus the [Dynamic] section Alttext setting. Style Display name=Font name;Width factor;Style Name Prefix E.g..Romans=Romans;0.7;ROM Dynamic Height. If [Dynamic] Alttext setting was _TEXT the style name created would be ROM_TEXT using the ROMANS.SHX file with a width factor of 0.7 Fixed Height For 2.5 high Model Text ,where [ModelText] 2.5=T2.5 the style name created would be ROMT25 using the ROMANS.SHX file with a width factor of 0.7

[Textheight]
This section lists the available text height for the particular client. The format for this file is, Text height=Text height E.g.. 2.5=2.5

[ModelSpace]
If Fontstyle is set to Fixed, This section specifies the style name to use for each text height for text generated in Model space. The style names specified here, will be created if they do not already exist in a prototype drawing. The format for this section is, Text Height=Style name

[PaperSpace]
If Fontstyle is set to Fixed, This section specifies the style name to use for each text height for text generated in Paper space. The style names specified here, will be created if they do not already exist in a prototype drawing. The format for this section is, Text Height=Style name

341

342

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

[Dynamic]
This section specifies the style name to use for 0 height text styles. The style names specified here, will be created if they do not already exist in a prototype drawing Text style settings for zero height styles Preferences Text Characteristics Type: String Default value: DPQ_TEXT Type: String Default value: DPQ_DIM Type: String Default value: DPQ_BLOCK Type: String Default value: _TEXT Description Specifies the style name to use for when Fontstyle is set to Dynamic and text generated in model space view ports. Specifies the style name to use for dimension text. Specifies the style name to use for text in blocks. Specifies the alternate font suffix used when generating alternate text styles.

Dimension

Block

AltText

Client System Definition File

343

Client System Definition File

The Client System definition file stores information related to the AutoCAD system variable setting that are unique to the client as well as available scales, blocks to use for various annotations and object parameters that may be specific to a particular client. File: dpq[3chr client code]sy.ini

[System]
Client system settings Preferences Defaultapp Prototype Characteristics Type: String Default value:= Type: String Default value:= Description Specifies a default application to load when this client is selected. Specifies a prototype to load when this client is selected. Allows for specific client layers, dimstyles and blocks to be predefined for each client if required. Specifies the default drawing format to use when creating new drawings. Paper Specifies Paper/Model format Model Specifies Model Format Initialmode Type: Switch Default value: Model Units Type: String Default value: Millimetres Specifies the initial drawing mode to begin new drawings. Only applied to Paper/Model format drawings. Options Paper and Model Specifies the default drawing units to use when creating new drawings. The values here must match the values specified in the Autosys.ini file [Units] section.

Formatdefault

Type : String Default value : Model

[Scaled Drawing Aids]

This section lists, AutoCAD system variables which require scaling (by the drawing scale factor) which AutoSYS will set on entry into a drawing. Any valid AutoCAD system variable that does not require scaling can be entered here with the value as required. It is important to only place valid names and settings here as AutoSYS will NOT check for authenticity, and incorrect values may cause unexpected results.
343

344

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

AutoCAD scaled system variable settings Preferences System variable name Characteristics String Description Any valid (Non scaled) AutoCAD system variable E.g.. ltscale=6 snapunit=10,10,10

[Fixed Drawing Aids]

This section lists, (non scaled) AutoCAD system variables which AutoSYS will set on entry into a drawing. Any valid AutoCAD system variable that does not require scaling can be entered here with the value as required. It is important to only place valid names and settings here as AutoSYS will NOT check for authenticity, and incorrect values may cause unexpected results. AutoCAD system variable settings Preferences System variable name Characteristics String Description Any valid (Non scaled) AutoCAD system variable E.g.. cmdecho=0 snapunit=10,10,10

[Scale]
This section lists the available scales that will be displayed in the Scale section of the Drawing Startup dialog, The first listed scale will be the default. The format for this file is, Scale description=scale value E.g..1:2.5=2.5

[Sections]
This section describes how section annotations are formatted when using the AutoSYS command DPQ_SECTION. The AutoSYS search path is used to locate the block files.

Client System Definition File

345

AutoSYS section annotation settings Preferences Sectioncorner Sectionblock1 Sectionblocktext Sectionblock2 Block1rotate Characteristics Type: String Default value: 10 Type: String Default value: dpq850 Type: String Default value: dpq851 Type: String Default value: dpq852 Type: Switch Default value: Off Description Specifies the length of corner lines. The name of the block used for the first section symbol The name of the block that contains the section letter The name of the block used for the last section symbol Specifies whether the section block specified in Sectionblock1 will rotate to align with the section line On Block will rotate Off Block will have a 0 rotation angle Block2rotate Type: Switch Default value: Off Specifies whether the section block specified in Sectionblock2 will rotate to align with the section line On Block will rotate Off Block will have a 0 rotation angle Symbolxxxxx Type: Comma delimited string Specifies a symbol name and scale factor for symbols to be inserted using DPQ_SYMBOLBLOCK command e.g.. Symbol00001=block;1.0 This parameter can be entered any number of times just by incrementing the number in xxxxx

345

346

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

[Object Parameters]
Object parameter settings Preferences Curveleader Curveleaderarrow Characteristics Type: String Default value: On Type: Real number String Default value: dimasz Type: Real Number String Default value: 10 Type: String Default value: Polyline Type: Switch Default value: On Description Specifies whether curved leader lines are used for material lists Specifies the arrow size for curved leaders. If dimasz is specified then the current value of DIMASZ is used. Specifies the spacing of dimension lines. Specifies the type of line to use when drawing rectangle. Line or Polyline Specifies whether to use AutoCAD setting for dimcenter or draw lines. On Draws lines Off Uses AutoCAD Settings. Specifies the default value for the Insert to client switch in the library manager dialog On Off Ammendmenttext Type: String Default value: 2.5 Draws lines Uses AutoCAD Settings.

Dimlineoffset

Rectangle Dimcenter

Inserttoclient

Type: Switch Default value: Off

Specifies the text height to use for amendment marks when using the DPQ_CLOUD Mark option Specifies the text height to use for amendment notes when using the DPQ_CLOUD Notes option Specifies the height to use for the amendment triangle when using the DPQ_CLOUD Mark option Specifies the block to use for the amendment marks when using the DPQ_CLOUD Block option

Ammendmentnote Type: String Default value: 5.0 Ammendmentsize Type: String Default value: 5.5

Ammendmentblock Type: String Default value: DPQ800

Dimension Styles Definition File

347

Dimension Styles Definition File

The Dimension styles definition file stores information related to the dimension settings for each of the AutoSYS dimension styles. AutoSYS will only use values from the style parameter file if the particular dimension style cannot be found in the drawing. In most cases the style name should be present either in the AutoSYS prototype or the client defined prototype. Having the style present in a prototype, will save time when creating new drawings, as only the scale and color are interrogated on styles already present in drawings. Each section of the dimension style, definition file, lists the dimension variable settings for each AutoSYS dimension style. AutoSYS 2000 uses 3 parent dimension style names. The style names control dimension format for Normal (whole number) dimensions, Tolerance and Limits dimensions. Each Client can have a style name allocated for each of these. AutoSYS stores this in the [Dimstylenames] Section.
n n n

DPQ_LINEAR specifies the normal single number dimensions. DPQ_TOLER specifies tolerance dimensions. DPQ_LIMITS specifies limits dimensions.

[Dimstylenames]
The style names to be used are defined in this section. Dim Style name Preferences Linear Characteristics Type: String Default value: DPQ_LINEAR Type: String Default value: DPQ_TOLER Type: String Default value: DPQ_LIMITS Description Specifies the style name for Normal Dimensions Specifies the style name for Tolerance Dimensions Specifies the style name for Limits Dimensions

Toler

Limits

347

348

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Each Parent style name can have a number of child styles attached to them. The naming convention for these child styles is the parent style name suffixed with a $ number.
n n n n n n

$0 specifies the Linear family. $2 specifies the Angular family. $3 specifies the Diameter family. $4 specifies the Radial family. $6 specifies the Ordinate family. $7 specifies the Leader family.

Each parent and child style has a section defined in the dimension style definition file. The parent style must have every dimension variable listed, while child styles need only have the differences from the parent, listed. It is important to note, that dimension variables that can have real numbers must be expressed as real numbers in the dimension style definition file, while those that must be expressed as integers must be entered as an integer. File: dpq[3chr client code]dm.ini

[DPQ_xxxxxxx]
The format for this file is, Dimvariable name = DXF code , setting

Drawing Sheet Definition File

349

Drawing Sheet Definition File

Each Drawing sheet size is defined as a separate section in the definition file. Each section defines the blocks to use for the title and label as well as limits and other parameters that define the sheet layout. The parameter details are described later in this chapter. The default sheet will always be the first defined drawing sheet in the file. To edit drawing sheet preferences 1 From the Client Name Setup list box choose the client name. AutoSYS will search for the definition files associated with that client and display the .INI file name found for each section. If the correct client code definition file is found the EDIT button will be enabled. If the fall back file is located then the edit button will be disabled and the Build button will be activated. If Build is selected a new client definition file will be created based on the file indicated, the EDIT button will then be enabled. 2 Choose Edit from the Drawing Sheets section. This will display the Drawing Sheet Editor dialog

Drawing Sheet Editor

The drawing sheet editor dialog displays a list of defined drawing sheet sizes
349

350

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

The current sheets can be edited or deleted and new sheets added to the list. The default drawing sheets size will be the first drawing sheet on the list. The AutoSYS Drawing sheet dialog box enables you to edit specific drawing sheets. The tools are described below. Sheet Size list box.Displays the list of available sheet sizes.
Sheet Size Edit Box.Displays

the current selection. Drawing sheets to be added are entered here before selecting the New button. Adds the drawing sheet displayed in the Edit box to the list of sheet sizes. If the sheet already exists the operation is ignored. Deletes the currently displayed sheet size from the list of sheet sizes. list box. Displays the AutoSYS Configure dialog box, which enables you to modify preferences relevant to the selected drawing sheet selected. Any changes made to preference settings in the AutoSYS Configure dialog box will be saved to the ini file indicated by the file name at the top of the dialog box, and the Editor dialog box will be closed. Aborts the dialog box. If changes have been made to any preferences they wont be saved.

New.

Delete.

Edit Button

Save

Cancel

Drawing Sheet Settings

Selecting Edit from the Drawing sheet dialog will display the AutoSYS Preferences editor allowing you to make changes to the sheet settings for the Drawing size chosen. Each setting is described below. File: dpq[3chr client code]sh.ini, E.g.. dpqstdsh.ini Section: [[2chr Sheet size]Sheet] E.g.. [A0Sheet]

Drawing Sheet Definition File

351

Drawing sheet parameter settings Preferences Xref Characteristics Type: String Default value: On Description Controls the insertion of Title blocks On Title blocks externally referenced Off Title blocks inserted. Overlay Title block xref overlaid. Controls the insertion of Title block labels. If Xref is On then this must be Off On Title blocks and labels are one drawing Off Title blocks and labels are two drawings. Specifies the name of the block to be used for the title block. A full path may be included otherwise the AutoSYS path is searched. Specifies the name of the block to be used for the title label block. A full path may be included otherwise the AutoSYS path is searched. Specifies the limits of the drawing sheet at scale 1.0. Specifies the co-ordinate of the lower left corner of the first view port. Specifies the co-ordinate of the upper right corner of the first view port. Specifies the name of the block to be used for the material list header. A full path may be included otherwise the AutoSYS path is searched. Specifies the name of the block to be used for the material list body. A full path may be included otherwise the AutoSYS path is searched.

Singletitle

Type: String Default value: Off

Sheetname

Type: String Default value: SSTD[2 Chr Sheet Size] Type: String Default value: SSTDTL[2 Chr Sheet Size] Type: Comma delimited String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: sstdtha1 Type: String Default value: sstdtma1

Titlename

Limits

Vportll Vportur Listheadername

Listname

351

352

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Preferences Itemname

Characteristics Type: String Default value: sstdtba1 Type: String Default value: sstdtpa1 Type: String Default value: 4 Type: Comma delimited String Default value: Type: String Default value: U Type: String Default value: 6 Type: String Default value: On

Description Specifies the name of the block to be used for the item number. A full path may be included otherwise the AutoSYS path is searched. Specifies the name of the block to be used for the parts description. A full path may be included otherwise the AutoSYS path is searched. Specifies the radius of the material list balloon at scale 1.0. Specifies the co-ordinate of the start position of the material list at scale 1.0. Specifies the direction the material list grows must either be U D L or R. Specifies the spacing (at scale 1.0) between material list entries. Specified whether a material list header is used. On Use List header Off Dont Use list header. Specifies whether to bypass prompts and go straight to the edit dialog when material listing On By pass prompts Off Issue normal prompts. Specifies the name of the block to be used for the revision. A full path may be included otherwise the AutoSYS path is searched. Specifies the co-ordinate of the start position of the revision at scale 1.0. Specifies the direction the material list grows. must either be U D L or R Specifies the spacing (at scale 1.0) between revision entries. Specifies the Number or Letter to use for the Original drawing (no revisions)

Partsname

Listballoon Listid

Listdir Listsize Listheader

Listignoreprompt

Type: Switch Default value: Off

Revname

Type: String Default value: sstdtra1 Type: String Default value: Type: String Default value: D Type: String Default value: 8 Type: String Default value: 0

Revid Revdir Revsize Revoriginal

Drawing Sheet Definition File

353

Preferences Revfirst

Characteristics Type: String Default value: 1

Description Specifies the Number or Letter to use for the first revision. If a letter is used then Letter revisions are used, if a number, then number revisions are used. All subsequent revisions are incremented based on this value. Specified whether a revision header is used. On Display a revision header Off Dont Use display a revision header. Specifies if an original drawing revision should be added before placing the first revision. On Display an original drawing revision Off Dont display an original drawing revision. Specifies the text to use in the Original Drawing revision.

Revheader

Type: String Default value: On Type: String Default value: On

Revuseoriginal

Revoriginaltext

Type: String Default value: Original Issue

Text Blockscale

Type: String Default text height to be used in this Default value: 2.5 drawing for Dimensions Type: String Specifies the scale factor for blocks Default value: 1.0 containing text. Block drawing in AutoSYS are based on a text height of 2.5 If the text in the drawing need to be 3.5 then set this value at 1.4 Type: String Default value: scale Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the SCALE

TScale

TDate

Type: String Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label Default value: date drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the DATE. AutoSYS updates this to the system date. Type: String Default value: drawn Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the DRAWN BY name. This is automatically update to the vale stored in Dpqname in the autosys.ini file.
353

TDrawn

354

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Preferences Client

Characteristics Type: String Default value: client Type: String Default value: tl1 Type: String Default value: tl2 Type: String Default value: tl3 Type: String Default value: dwgno Type: String Default value: rev Type: String Default value: rev

Description Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the CLIENT name. Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the First title line. Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the Second title line. Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the Third title line. Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the Drawing Number. Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the Revision number or letter. Specifies the Attribute tag in the revision drawing (specified in Revname) used to display the Revision number or letter.

TTl1

TTl2

TTl3

TDrawing

TRevision

RRevision

RDcn

Type: String Specifies the Attribute tag in the revision Default value: dcn drawing (specified in Revname) used to display the Revision Change number. Type: String Specifies the Attribute tag in the revision Default value: date drawing (specified in Revname) used to display the Revision Date. AutoSYS updates this to the system date. Type: String Specifies the Attribute tag in the revision Default value: des drawing (specified in Revname) used to display the Revision Description. Type: String Default value: Specifies the Attribute tag in the revision drawing (specified in Revname) used to display the Revision Reason.

RDate

RDescription

RReason

Drawing Sheet Definition File

355

Preferences RName

Characteristics Type: String Default value:

Description Specifies the Attribute tag in the revision drawing (specified in Revname) used to display who made the revision. AutoSYS uses the original drafters ID as the default.

LItem

Type: String Specifies the Attribute tag in the material Default value: item list drawing (specified in Listname) used to display the Item number. Specifies whether the tile attribute block is redefined when inserted. On Block reference is updated from server Off Existing internal block reference used

Redefinetitlename Type: Toggle

Plotdate

Type: String Specifies the Attribute tag in the title label Default value: plot drawing (specified in Titlename) used to display the Plot date. AutoSYS updates this to the system date when an AutoSYS plot is performed.

355

356

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

The Quick Client Utility

AutoSYS provides the means to define client settings down to the nth degree. The system has been designed so that ANY CAD standard can be thrown at it and AutoSYS will be able to handle it. However, most times all that is required is access to a set of drawing sheets and a layering setup. The Quick client utility is designed for this purpose. To create a client definition 1 Choose the Client Snapshot Build / Edit Button. This will display the Quick Client Build dialog.

The Quick Client Utility

357

2 From the Copy From Client Name list Choose the client you wish to base the new client on. The details will then be displayed in the dialog proper. 3 In the Copy To section enter the new client code and client description. 4 Choose Copy Now A complete set of client definition files will be created in the same directory as the originals and the Client name will be added to the AutoSYS system file. 5 Make the changes as required. Then when finished, Choose OK. Each section of the dialog will now be explained.

Drawing Sheets
In this section the names and insertion format for the title sheets is configured. Title Block Enter the block name of the Title block. The AutoSYS search path will be used to locate the block file.
Title Labels

Enter the block name of the Title labels block. The AutoSYS search path will be used to locate the block file. If Checked then the Title block will be Xrefd if not checked it will be inserted. If Checked then the Title labels (attributes) are part of the Title block and the title block will be inserted not Xrefd

Xref

Com

Layer Definitions
This section allow layers and colors to be mapped to the basic line styles required for AS1100. The Line descriptions come directly from AS1100. Layer Name Defines the name of the layer you wish to be mapped for each line style.
Pen Color

Defines the pen thickness for each line style. Defines the layer color for each line style. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog. Defines the linetype for each line style. Defines the file that contains the linetype settings.

Linetype File

357

358

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Text
This section defines text parameters. Layer Paper Defines the layer name for text generated in Paper Space.
Style Paper

Defines the style name for text generated in Paper Space. If Dynamic text is chosen in the Text Font section, this name will be the same for all text heights. If Fixed is chosen then a different style should be defined for each height. These styles will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled Defines the layer color for text generated in Paper Space. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog. Defines the layer name for text generated in Model Space and Model space view ports. Defines the style name for text generated in Model Space. If Dynamic text is chosen in the Text Font section, this name will be the same for all text heights. If Fixed is chosen then a different style should be defined for each height. These styles will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled. Defines the layer color for text generated in Model Space and Model space view ports. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog.

Color Paper

Layer Model

Style Paper

Color Paper

Dimensions
This section defines basic Dimensioning parameters. Layer Name Defines the layer name for dimensions.
Text Style

Defines the text style for Dimension text. This style must be a 0 height style. This style will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled Defines the color for the Dimension Lines. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog. Defines the color for the Dimension Extension Lines. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog.

Dimension color

Extension color

What Quick Client Does Not Do

359

Text color

Defines the color for the Dimension Text. Selecting the color box will display a color selection dialog.

Text Font
This section defines the font and text format. Font Edit Box Displays the text font to be used for Text and Dimension Text styles defined in the previous sections. These styles will be generated when a new drawing is created or when an existing drawing is rescaled
Width Factor Height Type

Defines the width factor to apply to text styles. Defines the text styles format. Dynamic will create 0 height fonts. Fixed will create fixed height fonts for each text height defined. Displays a file selection dialog to locate font files. The chosen file will be displayed in the Font edit box.

Browse

General
Saving and Cancelling the Dialog Cancel Closes the dialog box. If changes have been made to any preferences they wont be saved.
OK

Saves all values and Closes the dialog box

Please note, that quick client will always set Layerdirectmap to On

What Quick Client Does Not Do

Quick Client is designed to generate a client definition quickly based on one of your existing clients. For many cases, where all that is required is a layer, text and drawing sheet structure, this will be all that is required. If you require change to the material listing revisions and other sheet parameter then these task will need to be performed using the methods described in the Drawing sheet section of this chapter and also Chapter 6 of this manual.

359

360

Chapter 17

CLIENT DEFINITION PREFERENCES

Blank Page

18
PLOTTER PREFERENCES

Plotting drawings, even in a small drawing office, can be the bottleneck that slows down the release of drawing files. AutoSYS provides a quick plot command that not only opens up the bottleneck but establishes the correct color/pen mapping based on the plotter selected and the client file being plotted. This chapter describes
n n n

The AutoSYS plotting system How to setup a client based plotting environment How to customise the plotting system parameters.

361

362

Chapter 18

PLOTTER PREFERENCES

The AutoSYS Plotting System

AutoSYSs plotting command, DPQ_PLOT,differs from AutoCADs, in that it is specifically setup to plot drawing sheets quickly. Once AutoSYS has been setup to plot your drawing sheets the time required to initiate a plot is minimal. But first lets look at how AutoSYS handles the plot procedure. When plotting a drawing there are several things we need to know to enable the plot to output correctly. These are:
n n n n n

Drawing type, Paper space or model space. Drawing size and scale Layer color, pen mapping parameters for the particular drawing. Plotter to output to. Final drawing sheet size.

When plotting using AutoCADs plot dialog you would need to get all these values from the drawing before you ran the plot program. Drawings created with AutoSYS store all these (except plotter and final drawing size) in the drawing file, so when DPQ_PLOT plot is run, this data need not be entered again. All that is required is to select the plotter and final sheet size (the actual drawing size is used as default).

AutoSYS Plotting Definition Files

AutoSYS uses a number of different definition files to enable it to plot efficiently. These files can be stored locally or on a network server, the location being stored in the AutoSYS System Preferences file autosys.ini. The Plotting Definition files are described below.
n

Plotter definition files (dpqplot?.ini). Each configured plotter (.PC3) has a plotter definition file associated with it, E.g.. HPdesignjet.PC3 would have HPDesignjet.INI associated with it. This file contains the final output size and plot origin for each sheet size used in that plotter. The sheet sizes in the pc3 file must be tranposed ino the corresponding INI file for autosys plotting to work correctly. These files can be stored locally or on a network server. The location of these files is stored in the Plotter section of autosys.ini, details are given later in this chapter. Pen parameter files (ctb stb). These files store the AutoCAD color / pen mapping parameters. A number of different parameter files can be defined for each individual client for each plotter. The location of these files can be changed in the AutoCAD preferences dialog. Plot batch files (dpqplt-?.bat). Each configured plotter has a plotter

AutoSYS Plotting Definition Files

363

batch file associated with it, E.g.. Plotter 0 would be associated with dpqplt-0.bat Plotter 1 would be associated with dpqplt-1.bat. This file is run when plotting to a file is selected. When running on Windows NT plotting to a file is used to communicate with the LPT ports when a system device has taken over the port address. The location of these files is stored in the Plotter section of autosys.ini, details are given later in this chapter. These files must located in a directory that lies on the Operating system path.

Pen Parameter File

You can save plotter configuration settings which control the plot output. These settings are saved in plot configuration parameter files, which have an extension of .pcp. The .pcp file is created using the AutoCAD PLOT command. Multiple .pcp files can be created to control the plot format from one plot to another. Each plotting device defined in AutoCAD can have multiple .pcp files which AutoSYS can be configured to use. Naming Plot Pen Mapping Parameter Files For AutoSYS to use the .ctb or .stb files you create in its plot command it is necessary to name the files using the following structure. dpq[client code][ctb or stb number].ctb Example: dpqstd01.ctb
n

Client Code The client code is a three character code designed to group setup parameters. The code is used to specify drawing sheets, layers, system variables, and text. When you create a new drawing you specify the client code to use.

CTB or STB Number

The pcp number is an incrementing

364

Chapter 18

PLOTTER PREFERENCES

Definition File Search Order

AutoSYS will search for the Plotter Parameter and Plotter Batch files in the directory specified in Plotter System Settings. The pen mapping files are also located using Plotter System Settings, As pen mapping needs to be handled differently for individual clients and plotters. A number of different pen mapping files can be created for each client and plotter. The search order used by AutoSYS to locate Pen Parameter files is as follows, in the directory specified in Plotter System Settings:
n n n n n n

Search for the client files associated with the plotter chosen. Search for the client files associated with the base plotter (plotter 0). Search for the Base client files associated with the plotter chosen. Search for the Base client files associated with the base plotter (plotter 0). Search for the STD client files associated with the plotter chosen. Search for the STD files associated with the base plotter (plotter 0).

If all the searches fail, AutoSYS will report an error. This type of error is a major one it means AutoSYS does not have enough file to operate with. AutoSYS may need to be reinstalled.

Editing Plotter Preferences

All plotter preferences are edited by selecting the appropriate button in the plotter section of the AutoSYS preferences dialog.

Plotter System Settings

The system settings under Plotter tells AutoSYS where to find plotter parameter file and where to generate plot files.

Plotter Batch File Editor

365

To edit plotter system settings 1. From the Plotter option section of the AutoSYS preferences dialog Choose the System button. 2. Edit the system setting from the dialog displayed. Refer to Chapter 2 for details on using the preferences editor.

Plotter System Setting Parameters

File: autosys.ini

[Plotter]
Plotter system settings Preferences Plotterdef Characteristics Type: String Default value: c:\dpq_v7 Description The path to the location of the plotter definition files (.INI) for each client and plotter.

Plotterpcp

Type: String The path to the location of the plotting Default: c:\dpq_v7 files (.PCP) defined for each client and plotter. Type: String Default: c:\dpq_v7\xplot The drive and directory where plot files are created.

Plotfiledir

Plotbatch

Type: Switch The drive and directory where the plot Default: c:\dpq_v7 batch files are stored. Used when plotting to a file.

Plotter Batch File Editor

When plotting the plotting option in Plotting Config is set to FILE, AutoSYS will run the associated batch file. When running on Windows NT this batch file can be used to communicate with the LPT ports when a system device has taken over the port address. To edit plotter system settings 1. From the Plotter option section of the AutoSYS preferences dialog Choose the Batch.

366

Chapter 18

PLOTTER PREFERENCES

2. Select the appropriate bath file from the list, then Choose Edit.

Edit the file as required updating 3. each line in turn, then choose Save.

4. From the Batch file selection dialog choose Save.

Output
Selecting the Output button under Plotter Options will list the available output options available when plotting. It is simply a list of output ports with the addition of NONE and File. The usage is described below,
n

None, used when you wish to sent plots via the output device established in the plotter configuration in AutoCAD. File, used when plotting to a file. AutoSYS generates a plot file using the

Steps to setting up AutoSYS plotting

367

same name as the drawing (with a .PLT extension) and places it in the directory nominated in Plotter preferences. Once the plot file is written, the batch file associated with the plotter is executed. This batch file controls how the plot file is sent to the plotter.
n

All other settings, used to sent plots directly to the particular port, in network installations any port redirection will be honoured.

This list should not require modification. File: autosys.ini Section: [PlotOutput]

Steps to setting up AutoSYS plotting

Before you start configuring AutoSYS make sure that your output device is configured to work with AutoCAD, and you can plot using AutoCADs plot command, see AutoCAD documentation.To install a new plotter to work with AutoSYS Create a new plotter in AutoCAD 1. From the Pull down menu Select Files->Plotter manager 2. Select Add-A-Plotter Wizard icon from Plotter program group that is displayed 3. Follow the wizard to complete the addition of the new plotter The new plotter will be displayed in the program group Create a control interface file The control interface file allows AutoSYS to communicate with the plotter configuration file. This file is required because AutoCAD provides no tools to read parameters directly from the plotter .pc3 file. 1. From the AutoSYS pull down Select AutoSYS->Preferences. 2. In the dialog that is displayed select the newly created plotter from the Plotter section This action will create a new control file for this plotter. However, it will need to be configured to have each sheet size match the sheet sizes in the AutoCAD plotter PC3 file.
367

368

Chapter 18

PLOTTER PREFERENCES

3. Select the Properties button in the Plotter section to display the AutoCAD plotter properties dialog. 5. Select the Config button next to the plotter. This will display the dialog to edit the AutoSYS INI file for the same plotter. 6. The sheets sizes specified in the INI file to must match exactly the sheet sizes specified in the PC3 file. This is case sensitive and spaces are important. 7. When finished close both dialogs. 8. You should already be in a AutoSYS drawing. Select AutoCAD PLOT from the file pull-down

9. Set the plot parameters to plot the dawing correctly to the new printer. 10.Make a note of the following
Sheet size Oriantation Origin offsets (or center)

11.Select AutoSYS PLOT from the Standard Toolbar. 12.Select the plotter just configured. And pick the CONFIG button next to it. 13.Update the plot parameters copied above to the sheet size just tested. 14.Close the config dialog. 15.Plot the drawing. 16.Repeat items 10 to 15 for all sheet sizes.

AutoSYS Plot Configuration

369

This completes the process.

AutoSYS Plot Configuration

The AutoSYS plot command makes plotting a drawing sheet quicker and easier, as all the information on the plot size, scale etc. are pre-set. You will be able to plot your drawing at the scale the drawing was setup with in the AutoSYS Drawing Setup dialog box, or at a reduced scale so the drawing is plotted on a different drawing sheet size. Each plotter configured in AutoCAD has a unique AutoSYS configuration for sheet sizes. This is necessary as different printers/plotters have different media size and non printable area restrictions.

Sheet Size
The sheet sizes listed in the AutoSYS plotter INI file must match exactly the sheet sizes specified in the AutoCAD PC3 this file is associated with.

369

370

Chapter 18

PLOTTER PREFERENCES

To configure sheet sizes 1. From the Plotter option section of the AutoSYS preferences dialog Choose Config..

2. From the Sheet Sizes area select a sheet size from the list box. 3. In the Paper Size text boxes enter the sheet size exactly as stored in the PC3 file, (see Sheet Size section of this chapter). 4. Choose Update to save the values. Continue specifying sizes for each sheet size required. You can create new sheet sizes, or delete any sheet size that you wont use for the current plotter. 5. Choose Save.

19
TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

The look and feel of the drawing title block can be different for every company or even within different departments of the same company. Each client defined in AutoSYS has a title sheet definition file which identifies the drawing sheet parameters required for each drawing sheet. This chapter deals with
n

Specifying the drawing sheet sizes and the sheet parameters for each client definition Defining the Drawing sheet and Label blocks Defining Revision and Material List blocks

n n

371

372

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

AutoSYS Default Drawing Sheets

AutoSYS is supplied with a set of predefined drawing sheets. These sheets include the ISO standard A0 to A4 and B1. These standard sheets can be used as is, or modified to suit your companies particular sheet outline and title block requirements. The basic setup described in this chapter will normally be performed only once. This system is also very well suited to those doing work for numerous clients who all have their own sheet layouts. It greatly simplifies adopting different title blocks and sheet layouts. A default set of drawing sheets have been supplied for immediate use, or Customisation, as required. The supplied sheets can be used as examples of how the system works, or you can alter it as you wish instead of creating your own from scratch. Full details of how to set up or alter a system are given at the end of this chapter. The AutoSYS sheet and title block system is based on a number of special blocks created to take the place of the pre-printed title block sheets commonly used when using hand drafting methods. This system is designed on the assumption that the plotter will draw all the sheet outlines. This means that you put a clean piece of paper in the plotter and the entire drawing including the title block is plotted. Although this method is the most economical and effective, the system can be adapted to using pre-printed sheets if you wish, by simply having the sheet block drawings comprised of nothing at all. They must still exist for the system to operate, but can be blank drawings. The title block system includes the definition of material lists and revision history lists and the blocks associated with them. To simplify the explanations in the remainder of this chapter, we will refer only to A1 size sheets, but the same principles apply to other sizes.

Outline Sheet & Title Files Described

The following files are required for the system to function correctly. If any of them are missing the system may fail to work. The files that are used by the system can be any name, however the naming convention we adopted has worked well in our own drawing office, and is used here as an example of one way to do the job. The filenames all start with S (for Sheet), then have a three-character identifier which matches the client name, and a set of standard endings that distinguish the various components of the system. The drawings supplied with AutoSYS use the default identifier of STD, which must always exist. If you use more than one set, the others will use a different 3-letter identifier. The final two characters are always the sheet size code. The various block files include the sheet outline

Outline Sheet & Title Files Described

373

(equivalent to a printed sheet), the variable title block text (as attributes), and blocks for building up material lists and revision tables. In detail, the set of files for one size (A1) and one design (the default STD) is as follows. For other sheet sizes substitute for the A1" characters, and for other sheet designs substitute for the STD" 3-letter identifier characters. Keyname from Block Name definition file Sheetname Titlename Revname Listname Listballoon Partsname sstda1.dwg sstdtla1.dwg sstdtra1.dwg sstdtma1.dwg sstdtba1.dwg sstdtpa1.dwg Function The sheet outline design i.e. pre-printed sheet Labels: Attributes for writing in the title block Block for one line of the revision table Block for one line of material list Block for balloon reference numbers Block for Part reference labels Block for material list header

Listheadername sstdtha1.dwg

File Search Order

AutoSYS will search for the blocks associated with the particular sheet size in the following fashion. The files used for each of the block details above are defined in the drawing sheet definition files for each client.
n

If A full path is specified in the definition file then the search will be explicit, based on the full path and file name. If no path is specified then the file name listed in the definition file will be located using the AutoSYS search path. A search if made on the AutoSYS path using the naming convention described earlier for the current client. I.e.. If the current client is MIK and the sheet size is A1 then a search will be made for dpqmika1.dwg A search if made on the AutoSYS path using the naming convention described earlier for the Baseclient, as defined in the Baseclient setting of the [System] section of autosys.ini. I.e.. If the Baseclient is COL and the sheet size is A1 then a search will be made for dpqcola1.dwg A search if made on the AutoSYS path using the naming convention described earlier for the STD client .i.e. the sheet size is A1 then a search will be made for dpqstda1.dwg

If all the searches fail, AutoSYS will report an error. This type of error is a major

374

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

one, as it means AutoSYS does not have enough files to do its job correctly. AutoSYS may need to be reinstalled.

SSTDA1.DWG
The sheet outline drawing. This has all the title block and drawing frame border lines, fold marks or microfilm centering marks if used, grid line letters and numbers if used, standard notes, title block logo and title block text that never changes. That is, everything you would get printed on a pre-printed sheet. It makes little difference what layer the main parts are drawn on except for a special layer TITLE. All layers except layer TITLE are frozen in the block drawing. The drawing area guideline (the one you see when starting a new drawing) is drawn on the layer called TITLE. This layer is THAWED and turned ON. This guide outline (shown very heavy on the illustration below) is intended to show the area within which you may draw to avoid drawing over the top of standard notes and lists that are part of the sheet design. We call it the drawing area guideline. If you use actual pre-printed sheets to plot onto then this block drawing would contain nothing except the drawing area guideline. On the screen it is set to show very faintly (color 8). This sheet block is externally referenced into each drawing when you start a

drawing area

new AutoSYS drawing. Because all layers except TITLE are frozen they will not be visible in the drawing. Freezing the main layers means that the time for redraws and regens in the normal editing is speeded up. Since the block is XREFed rather than INSERTed the sheet data is not copied into every drawing you draw. This saves a lot of disk space, otherwise the sheet details would be duplicated in every drawing on your system would soon add up to megabytes. It

Outline Sheet & Title Files Described

375

just means you have to remember if you give someone a disk with one of your AutoSYS drawings, to also give them the sheet block drawing also. AutoSYS has a system for thawing the sheet layers and freezing the drawing area guideline layer before plotting and restoring after. Refer to chapter 12 Plotting your Drawing for details.

STDTLA1.DWG
The title block text for each individual drawing. This block gets INSERTed into every drawing file. The title block text is defined as ATTRIBUTES, and the actual text to use for each drawing is entered in a dialogue box when this block is inserted into a drawing. The text can be changed of course later by attribute editing. This block contains no visible lines, only the attribute definitions, located to suit the spaces provided in the title block drawing, sstda1.dwg and on layers with colors to use pen widths to suit the text height. The attribute tag names shown in the following table are the default, as defined in this drawing. The following ATTRIBUTE definitions MUST be associated in the Drawing sheet .ini file, for all the AutoSYS functions to work. Tag TL1 TL2 TL3 CLIENT DATE SCALE DRAWN PLOT REV Prompt Title Line 1 Title Line 2 Title Line 3 Client name Date Scale Drawn by Plotted on Revision

If a drawing produced with AutoSYS is edited in AutoSYS then PLOT, DATE and SCALE are altered by AutoSYS automatically.

376

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

SSTDTHA1.DWG
The Material list Header block. This block is inserted only once per drawing and then only if a material list is used.

Insertion

SSTDTMA1.DWG
The Material list block. This block contains a single line for the material list table and is inserted once per itemnumber. It is similar to the Header block but comprises attributes for the text and border lines.

SSTDTRA1.DWG
The revision list block. This block contains table lines and attributes and is inserted once for each revision. AutoSYS uses the same block as the revision list header with the attribute default values being used for the headings

Insertion point

SSTDTBA1.DWG
The Balloon reference block is just a circle with an attribute for the item number. It is implemented this way so that it is possible to use a different size for larger sheets if required. That allows for the AS1100 requirement for larger text on A1 and B1 sheets, or for using different sizes for any other reason.

SSTDTPA1.DWG
The Part reference block is a similar case to the Balloon block.
Part number Item number

Insertion point

Creating Sheet Outline Sets

377

Creating Sheet Outline Sets

As stated before, it is often more convenient to copy the supplied sample sheet files (the STD set) and alter them rather than creating a new set from scratch. The most important thing then is not to alter the names of the attributes or the order in which they appear in the blocks. Where they are located on the sheet or what layer they use or what text style or height doesnt matter at all. It would be best to alter our samples even when your design is going to be quite different. The following describes the process from scratch just to be completely thorough, but we recommend altering our samples as the easier method. Many users already have printed sheet drawings that they have been simply inserting into every new drawing. These can easily be adapted to the AutoSYS system, and these notes will explain how.

Determine Plotter Limits

First you must find out what are the actual Hard Clip Limits for each of the sheets you use in your plotter. That is the corner co-ordinates of the area of a sheet within which that plotter can actually make pen marks. The no-go perimeter size differs with different makes, but usually involves the width of the pinch wheels at the sides and a biggish margin at one end caused by the displacement of the grip wheels and the pen carriage. These margins can sometimes dictate a modification of established sheet designs, or prevent use of existing printed sheets. Some plotters, such as Hewlett-Packard, can be switched to smaller margins, but then the user takes responsibility for designing sheets so as to avoid plotting where the pinch wheels run. The limits will usually need to be found out by plotting a test drawing comprising a blank sheet outline, and watching the screen dialogue. It must be plotted with a direct connection to the plotter, not to a file. If the drawing extents exceed the plotter hard clip limits you will see a message that says so and also shows the current hard clip limits in brackets. As an example, for the Hewlett-Packard plotters, switched to expand (minimum margins), the margins are 5mm on the grip sides and right-hand end and 30mm at the left end. If the HPs switches are set to normal then the no-plot margins are 15mm and 38mm instead. The actual margins will increase a bit when the plotter measures the sheet if the paper is not loaded squarely or is not trimmed truly square.

Preparation
When editing any of the sheet files, make sure you open the drawing files, do not insert the blocks into another file and Wblock them out. That would interfere with normal use as a block. In the following examples we will create a A1 set. The procedure for the other sheet sizes is the same, just replace the A1 with the Appropriate sheet size.

378

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

Draw the sheet outline

If you are going to create replacements for the default sheets (the STD set) you should first COPY the STD sample set to something else, so you wont wipe them out forever. Possibly you could change the STD to DPQ as in sdpqa1.dwg etc.. To draw the sheet outline [sstda1]: 1 Create a new drawing and name it S[3 char CLIENT CODE]A1 If you wish to use a pre-existing sheet drawing such as a1sheet.dwg, open that file, Then pick Save As. from the file menu and save it with the appropriate AutoSYS sheet file name such as sstda1.dwg, or s???a1.dwg if it is not to be the default sheet design. When renaming, be sure to select the AutoSYS BLOCK directory to place it in. (That is important.) 2 Set the limits to the full sheet size. I.e.. for A1 it would be 849x594 Command : limits Lower left corner :<0,0>: 0,0 Upper right corner <420,297: 841,594 Then hit enter 3 Then Zoom to the limits Command : Zoom All/Center/Extents/Previous/Window/<Scale(X/XP)>: All 4 Draw the outlines using the normal commands. Draw the title block frame and logo (or insert the logo block), and any unchanging text, and unchanging standard notes. Think of this drawing as being the same as a pre-printed sheet used with hand drafting methods. Check the following items are present : Title outlines Revision header outlines and labels Drawn, date, title and other text labels Company logos Standard copyright notes Be sure the UCS is set to World and 0,0 is the lower left corner of the drawing 6 Make a trial plot to check that the sheet drawing fits on the paper Edit the drawing again to make any corrections needed, such as moving the whole thing relative to the origin, or reducing the width or height a little. Repeat the test plot and edit until correct.

Creating Sheet Outline Sets

379

7 Locate the position for the material list. Command : ID

Point : Select the point where the material list will be inserted

This point must match the base point of the material list block. Write down the co-ordinate. This point is entered into the Listid parameter in the client definition file. To make locating this point easier, the material list block could be Xref attached into the drawing, the point located then xref detached. 8 Locate the position for the revision list. Command : ID
Point : Select the point where the revision list will be inserted

This point must match the base point of the material list block. Write down the co-ordinate. This point is entered into the Revid parameter in the client definition file. To make locating this point easier, the revision list block could be Xref attached into the drawing, the point located then xref detached. 9 Create a layer TITLE and set the color to Grey. Command : Layer
?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: new

Layer Name: TITLE

?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: C

Color : 8 Enter
?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: Enter

The current layer will now be TITLE 10 Draw a POLYLINE around the internal area available for drawing. This is the Drawing area guideline and encloses the Available Drawing area previously mentioned. It may be a simple rectangle or may have jiggles to step around areas to be occupied by standard notes etc..

380

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

11 Now turn all layers on then freeze all the layers except TITLE. The best way to do this is from the command line as described below: Command : Layer
?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: ON Layer Name: *

?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: F
Layer Name: ~TITLE ?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: Enter

Hit Enter when finished. This will freeze all layers except the title layer. 12 Save the drawing.

Create the Title Attributes Block

The text that appears in the title block and differs for each drawing is defined in the form of Attributes in this file. This file gets inserted into each drawing. This block file contains nothing except attribute definitions, carefully placed to appear within the title block boxes. These block files are named: S[3 char CLIENT CODE]TL[Sheet Size]. E.g. for a client code of DRA and a sheet size of A1 the file name would be: SDRATLA1.DWG The ATTRIBUTE definitions outlined in Table 4-1 MUST be present for all the AutoSYS functions to work. You may define attributes additional to those used in the sample title blocks, To draw the title labels [sstdtla1]: 1 Choose Open from the file menu. 2 In the Choose File to Open dialogue box, select one of the supplied title sheet label drawings that matches the sheet size you wish to create. I.e. for A1 Choose sstdtla1.dwg 3. Choose Save As from the File menu. 4 In the Save Drawing As dialogue box enter the new name E.g. For a client code of DRA and a sheet size of A1 the file name would be SDRATLA1 Be sure to place the file in the AutoSYS block directory. If you installed AutoSYS in the default directory, this file will be found in C:\DPQ_v7\BLOCK

Creating Sheet Outline Sets

381

5 From the File menu choose External Reference. then choose Attach. 6 In the Select File to Attach dialogue box, Choose the title sheet outline created in the previous section (sstda1.dwg). 7 Type in 0,0 as the insertion point. and 1 for the X and Y scale factor 8 Thaw all the layers Command : Layer
?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: T Layer Name: * ?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: Enter

Hit Enter when finished. This will display the full sheet outline. 9 Use AutoCAD commands to move the attribute tags around to fit in with the new layout. To change the order in which the attributes are displayed when inserted
n n

Draw a circle at some point in the drawing Select all the attribute tags and move them from 0,0 to the center of the circle. Copy the attribute tags from the center of the circle to 0,0. But when selecting the tags pick them one at a time in the order you wish them to appear, do not use window or crossing etc.. Erase the original set of tags and the circle. Check the following items : All required Tags are present. The UCS is set to World and 0,0 is the lower left corner of the drawing. All attribute options must be set to None (N).

n n n n n

10 Do a trial plot to check the locations. 11 From the File menu choose External Reference. Then choose Detach. 12 Enter the file name of the sheet outline (sstda1.dwg) This removes the outline sheet from this drawing 13 Save the drawing

382

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

Create the Revision History Block

A revision history block gets inserted into the drawing for each revision. This block file contains outlines and attribute definitions. These block files are named: S[3 char CLIENT CODE]TR[Sheet Size]. E.g. for a client code of DRA and a sheet size of A1 the file name would be: SDRATRA1.DWG To be fully compatible with AutoSYS the ATTRIBUTE definitions in the supplied blocks MUST be referenced in the Drawing Sheet .INI file as described earlier in this chapter. In the standard system the revision header is located in the upper right corner of the sheet and grows downwards. To draw the revision history block [sstdtra1]: 1 Choose Open from the file menu. 2 In the Choose File to Open dialogue box, Choose one of the supplied title sheet label drawings that matches the sheet size you wish to create. I.e. for A1 Choose sstdtra1.dwg 3. Choose Save As from the File menu. 4 In the Save Drawing As dialogue box enter the new name 5 From the File menu choose External Reference Then choose Attach. 6 In the Select File to Attach dialogue box, Choose the title sheet outline created in the previous section (sstda1.dwg). 7 Type in 0,0 as the insertion point. and 1 for the X and Y scale factor 8 Thaw all the layers Command : Layer
?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: T Layer Name: * ?/Make/Set/New/On/OFF/Color/LType/Freeze/Thaw/Lock/Unlock: Enter

Hit Enter when finished. This will display the full sheet outline. 9 Use AutoCAD commands to move the attribute tags around to fit in with the new layout and to modify the outline positions

Creating Sheet Outline Sets

383

Check the following items : All required Tags are present. All attribute options must be set to None (N). 10 At the command line type Base. 11 Select the location for the insertion point Upper left corner for a downward growing history Lower left corner for an upward growing history 12 Do a trial plot to check the locations. 13 From the File menu choose External Reference. Then choose Detach. 14 Enter the file name of the sheet outline (sstda1.dwg) This removes the outline sheet from this drawing 15 Save the drawing

Create the Material List Block

A material list gets inserted into the drawing for each list item. This block file contains outlines and attribute definitions. These block files are named: S[3 char CLIENT CODE]TMR[Sheet Size]. E.g. for a client code of DRA and a sheet size of A1 the file name would be: SDRATMA1.DWG To be fully compatible with AutoSYS the ATTRIBUTE definitions in the supplied blocks MUST be referenced in the Drawing Sheet .INI file as described earlier in this chapter. The material list form should not be altered in so far as the number of attributes present. You can however, alter the prompts issued. In the standard system the material list header is located in the lower right corner of the sheet and grows upwards. To draw the material list block [sstdtma1]: 1 Choose Open from the file menu. 2 In the Select File to Open dialogue box, Choose one of the supplied title sheet label drawings that matches the sheet size you wish to create. I.e. for A1 Choose sstdtma1.dwg
383

384

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

3 Choose Save As from the File menu. 4 In the Save Drawing As dialogue box enter the new name 5 Use AutoCAD commands to move the attribute tags around to fit in with the new layout and to modify the outline positions Check the following items : All required Tags are present. All attribute options must be set to None (N). 6 At the command line type Base. 7 Select the location for the insertion point Lower right corner for an upward growing history Upper right corner for a downward growing history 8 Save the drawing

Create the Material List Header Block

A material list header gets inserted into the drawing only once. This block file contains outlines and Header labels to match the material list block. These block files are named: S[3 char CLIENT CODE]THR[Sheet Size]. E.g. for a client code of DRA and a sheet size of A1 the file name would be: SDRATHA1.DWG The procedure for modifying is similar to the material list block.

Other Blocks Associated with the Title Outline

A number of other blocks are also associated with the outline sheets and can be modified to suit individual clients these are as follows. Block Name SSTDTPA# SSTDTBA# Function Part Reference Balloon Reference

Creating Sheet Outline Sets

385

Update the Client Definition File

A number of drawing sheet parameters must be updated in Client definition file. Listed below are the main setting that should be changed. Refer to Chapter 4 page 43 for an explanation of how to modify these values. Sheetname The file name of the drawing border, in this case sdraa1
Titlename Limits Vportll Vportur Listname

The file name of the title labels, in this case sdratla1 The limits of the drawing e.g.. 841,594 The id of the lower left corner of the first viewport The id of the upper right corner of the first viewport The file name of the material list block, in this case sdratma1 The file name of the material list header block, in this case sdratha1 The file name of the item number block, in this case sdratba1 The id of first insertion of the material list The file name of the title labels, in this case sdratra1 The id of first insertion of the revision list

Listheadername

Listballoon

Listid Revname Revid

Each of these parameters must be updated for EACH drawing sheet size defined for each client. Other parameters can be changed to reflect the new drawing sheet. Refer to chapter 4 for full details of all the options.

385

386

Chapter 19

TITLE BLOCKS & DRAWING SHEETS

Blank Page

Index

A
Angles between lines, 4-46 Attribute Edit global strings, 8-93 Refreshing Data, 8-93 Attributes, 8-92 change settings, 8-92 change value, 8-92 create, 8-92 dialog box entry, 8-93 edit properties, 8-93

Blips, 5-52 Blocks, 8-80 attributes, 8-92, 8-93 creating, 8-81 creating slides of, 8-82 explode, 8-86 nested, 8-81, 8-86 remaking, 8-87, 8-89, 8-91 viewing internal, 8-83 Break line text, 9-101 Breaking lines, 6-56 and change layer, 6-57

B
Batch operations Creating Symbol Libraries, 13-158, 13-159, 13-161 overview, 13-154 plotting, 13-154, 13-155, 13-157 selecting a directory, 13-155 User defined, 13-162, 13-163, 13-165, 13-167 Batch plotting, 13-154, 13-155, 13-157 directory selection, 13-155 drawing name, 13-154 drawing scale, 13-157 exiting, 13-157 initiating, 13-154 plot configuration parameter file, 13-157

C
Change text to lower case, 9-101 Change text to upper case, 9-101 Circles drawing, 4-45 Client code, 11-117 plot configuration parameter file, 12-145, 18-361 Command DPQ_MVIEW, 11-130 DPQ_ORTHOVIEWPORT, 11-131 Command system AS1100 standards, 1-2 Commands current drawing information, 4-47

Index

DDATTE, 11-121 Default responses, 3-37 detail symbol, 11-139 DPQ_12DIM13, 15-173 DPQ_12DIM13STY, 15-173 DPQ_AMENDMK, 15-173 DPQ_ARCDIST, 15-174 DPQ_ASCIIDRAWING, 15-175 DPQ_ATTUPD, 15-175, 15-176 DPQ_BATCH, 16-181 16-177, 16-178, 16-179, 16-180,

DPQ_DIMCENT, 18-205 DPQ_DIMDIALOG, 10-111, 18-206 DPQ_DIMLEADER, 18-207 DPQ_DIMLINE, 18-207 DPQ_DIMobject, 18-207 DPQ_DIMREBUILD, 18-208 DPQ_DIMRESET, 18-208 DPQ_DIMSCALERESET, 18-208 DPQ_DIMSCALESET, 18-209 DPQ_DIMTOCURRENTSTYLE, 18-209 DPQ_DIMTOGGLE, 18-209 DPQ_DIMUPDATE, 18-210 DPQ_DISPCFG, 18-210 DPQ_DISPLAYMSVIEWPORT, 11-129, 18-211 DPQ_DRAWBREAK, 18-211 DPQ_DZOOM, 5-50, 5-51, 18-212 DPQ_EDITOR, 19-213 DPQ_EXTEND, 6-62, 19-214 DPQ_FBI, 20-215 DPQ_FBINEXT, 20-215 DPQ_FILLET2LINES, 6-63, 20-215, 20-216 DPQ_GETANGLE, 4-46, 21-217 DPQ_GETVPSCALE, 21-217, 21-218 DPQ_IP, 22-219 DPQ_IPMARK, 22-219 DPQ_ITEM, 22-219, 22-220, 22-221, 22-222 DPQ_ITEMRESET, 22-223, 22-224 DPQ_JOINLINE, 23-225 DPQ_LAYCONVERT, 24-228 DPQ_LAYER, 24-227 DPQ_LAYEREXTENDED, 24-229 DPQ_LAYERMAKE, 24-230 DPQ_LAYERMODE, 7-75, 24-230, 24-231 DPQ_LAYEROFF, 7-74, 24-232 DPQ_LAYERON, 7-74, 24-233

DPQ_BLOCK, 8-81, 16-182, 16-183, 16-184 DPQ_BLOCKEXPLODE, 8-86, 16-185 DPQ_BLOCKREMAKE, 16-186, 16-187, 16-188 8-87, 8-88, 16-185,

DPQ_BLOCKUPDATE, 16-189 DPQ_BREAKATLINE, 16-190 DPQ_BREAKBETWEEN, 6-57, 16-191 DPQ_BREAKCHANGE, 6-57, 16-191 DPQ_BREAKEND, 16-192 DPQ_BREAKEQUAL, 16-192 DPQ_BREAKINT, 16-192 DPQ_BREAKMULTIPLE, 16-193, 16-194 DPQ_CHANGELAYER, 7-78, 17-195 DPQ_CIRCLEIMP, 17-195 DPQ_CLEARSYS, 17-196 DPQ_CLIENT, 17-196, 17-197, 17-198 DPQ_CLOUD, 11-136, 17-199 DPQ_COPYROTATE, 6-58, 17-200 DPQ_CURVELEADER, 17-200, 17-201, 17-202 DPQ_DDATTE, 18-203 DPQ_DDEDIT, 18-203 DPQ_DDMODIFY, 18-203 DPQ_DETAIL, 18-204 DPQ_DETAILSCALE, 18-204

Index

DPQ_LAYERSET, 7-73, 24-233 DPQ_LIBMANAGER, 24-238 DPQ_LIBRARY, 24-237 DPQ_LINESTOPOINT, 24-238 DPQ_LISTING, 24-239 DPQ_LRS, 24-240, 24-241 DPQ_MAINSHEET, 25-243 DPQ_MEASURE, 25-243 DPQ_MIDLINE, 6-59, 25-243 DPQ_MLIST, 25-244, 25-245, 25-246 DPQ_MOVEROTATE, 6-60, 25-247 DPQ_MSVPCREATE, 25-248, 25-249 11-126, 11-128, 25-247,

DPQ_RESCALE, 11-118, 28-269, 28-270 DPQ_REVISION, 11-138, 28-271, 28-272 DPQ_RLIST, 28-273 DPQ_ROTATE, 28-273, 28-274, 28-275 DPQ_SECTION, 11-141, 29-277 DPQ_SECTIONBLOCK, 29-277 DPQ_SETMSVIEWPORT, 29-278 DPQ_SHEETOFF, 3-38, 11-118, 29-279 DPQ_SHEETON, 3-38, 11-118, 29-278 DPQ_SNAP0, 29-279 DPQ_SNAPSET, 29-280 DPQ_STATUS, 29-280 DPQ_SWAP, 6-61, 29-281, 29-282 DPQ_TERMINAL, 30-283 DPQ_TEXT, 30-283 DPQ_TEXTBOX, 30-284 DPQ_TIME, 30-284 DPQ_TOFF, 30-285 DPQ_TON, 30-285 DPQ_TRIM, 6-62, 30-285 DPQ_TXTBRK, 30-286 DPQ_TXTCONT, 30-286 DPQ_TXTINSERT, 30-287 DPQ_TXTLOWER, 30-287 DPQ_TXTRPL, 30-288 DPQ_TXTSCALE, 30-288 DPQ_TXTSRPL, 30-289 DPQ_TXTUPPER, 30-289, 30-290 DPQ_VIEWSET, 31-291 DPQ_VPALIGN, 11-133, 31-291, 31-292 DPQ_WBLOCKALL, 8-86, 32-293 DPQ_WRITEBLOCK, 8-86, 32-293, 32-294 DPQ_ZOOMALL, 11-131, 33-295 DPQ_ZOOMXP, 11-132, 33-295, 33-296, 33-297, 33-298

DPQ_MSVPGETDATA, 11-128 DPQ_MSVPRESCALE, 11-128, 25-249 DPQ_MTEXT, 25-249, 25-250 DPQ_OFFSET/2, 6-59, 26-251 DPQ_OFFSETIMP/2, 26-251 DPQ_OFFSETIMPERIAL, 26-252 DPQ_ORTHOVPORT, 26-252 DPQ_PARALLEL, 4-45, 27-253 DPQ_PARTBREAKLINE, 27-253 DPQ_PITEM, 27-254 DPQ_PLOT, 12-147, 27-258 DPQ_PREFDEFAULT, 27-262 DPQ_PREFDIM, 27-263 DPQ_PREFLAYER, 27-263 DPQ_PREFSYSTEM, 27-264 DPQ_PREFTEXT, 27-264 DPQ_PSPACEONLY, 27-264 DPQ_PURGEDPQ, 27-264 DPQ_RECOM, 28-267 DPQ_RECTANGLE, 4-44, 28-267 DPQ_REINITP, 28-267 DPQ_REINITS, 28-268

Index

english size holes, 4-45 filleting lines, 6-63 full sheet, 5-50 Full sheet, 3-38 layers all on, 7-74 line text, 9-97 mark number label, 11-142 metric size holes, 4-45 OPEN, 3-40 Option selection, 3-37 paragraph text, 9-98, 9-99 PICKADD, 6-56 PICKAUTO, 6-56 QSAVE, 3-41 section label, 11-141 Selection of, 3-36 Yes / no response, 3-37 Continue line text, 9-100 Copying and rotating, 6-58 objects, 6-58, 6-59 Creating script files for batch processors, 13-163 Creating Symbol Libraries, 13-158, 13-159, 13-161 Creating the full sheet view, 5-50 Crosshairs rotating, 5-53 setting to zero angle, 5-53

Center lines to hole groups, 10-113 Circumferential, 10-114 decimal places, 10-109, 10-110 default text, 10-112, 10-113 DIMLFAC, 10-108 DIMSCALE, 10-108 floating viewport layers, 10-105, 10-106 layer, 10-105 limits and tolerances, 10-111 model space layer, 10-106 Overrides, 10-107 paper space layer, 10-106 scale, 11-116 styles, 10-106 text height, 10-105 text style, 10-105 Updating existing dimensions, 10-112 Updating from dialog, 10-111 Display Active Viewport Bounding Box, 11-129 DPQ_NEWTAB, 3-39 Drawing information on, 4-47, 13-162 time spent in, 4-47 Drawing format, 11-116 Drawing scale text heights, 9-96 Drawing sheet, 3-38, 3-39, 11-116 changing paper size, 11-119 client code, 11-117 Drawing area, 3-38 format, 11-116 full view, 5-50 Full view, 3-38 Hiding, 3-38

D
Detail symbols, 11-139, 11-141 Dimension styles, 10-106 in prototype, 10-106 Dimension units, 10-109, 10-110 Dimensions, 10-105, 10-107 adding a prefix, 10-112 adding a suffix, 10-112

Index

paper size, 11-116, 11-119 re-scale, 11-118 revisions, 11-136, 11-137 scale, 11-116, 11-119 Showing, 3-38 title block, 11-119 visibility, 11-117 Drawing Sheets, 19-370 Balloon Reference Block, 19-374 Material List Block, 19-374 Material List Header Block, 19-374 Outline Drawings, 19-372 Part Reference Block, 19-374 Revision List Block, 19-374 Title Block, 19-373 Updating Old Blocks, 19-373 Drawing timer, 4-48

Filleting objects, 6-62, 6-63 Floating viewports aligning, 11-133 creating, 11-129, 11-131, 11-133, 11-135 layer visibility control, 7-77 orthographic views setup, 11-131 scaling, 11-132 zooming, 11-131

G
Grips, 5-53

H
Highlight, 5-52

I
Item List Balloon Reference, 22-219

L
layout , 3-32 selection, 7-66

E
Ending AutoSYS, 3-41 Enhanced layer name structure, 7-70 Enhanced layers setting, 7-70 turn off by secondary layer name, 7-75 turn off layers by pen size, 7-76 turn on except pen size, 7-76 visibility control in floating viewports, 7-77 Existing drawings Non AutoSYS, 3-41 Opening, 3-40 Exploding blocks, 8-86 nested, 8-86, 8-87 Extended layers dialog box, 7-71 Extending multiple lines, 6-62 External reference drawing control, 8-94

Layer visibility dialog box, 7-75 Layers all on, 7-74 basic, 7-68 changing an objects layer, 7-78 creating basic, 7-68 current by selecting an object, 7-72 dimensions, 10-105 dimensions in floating viewports, 10-105, 10-106 enhanced, 7-68 in prototype, 7-68 setting, 7-72 structure, 7-67, 7-69, 7-71 text, 9-97 turning all off except selected layer, 7-74 turning off, 7-74

Index

visibility, 7-73, 7-75, 7-77 visibility control in floating viewports, 7-77 Limits and tolerances, 10-110 Line draw midway between two lines, 6-59 Lines angle between, 4-46 at specified distance and angle, 4-46 break and change layer, 6-57 breaking between, 6-56

Drawing area, 3-32

O
Object snap running, 4-46 Offsetting, 6-58 Ortho, 5-52

P
Plot Configuration Sheet size, 18-366 Panning half screen, 5-52, 5-53 using DPQ_DZOOM, 5-51 Paper size, 11-116 drawing setup, 11-119 Paper space, 11-122, 11-123 Dimension, 10-108 scale, 11-116 Paper space setup, 11-116 Parallel lines drawing, 4-45 filleting, 6-63 midway between two lines, 6-59 Plot Configuration Orientation, 18-366 Origin offsets, 18-366 Plot configuration parameter file client code, 12-145, 18-361 creating, 12-145, 18-365 naming, 12-145, 18-361 saving, 12-146 Plot configuration parameters file, 12-144, 18-365 Client code, 3-36 Plotter installation, 12-144, 18-365 Plotting, 12-144, 18-365 AutoSYS setup, 12-147, 18-366, 18-367

M
Make block dialog box, 8-81 Mark number label, 11-142 Material List Downward Growing, 19-374 Material List Header Block, 19-374 Menu Tablet, 3-36 Toolbars, 3-36 Model space setup, 11-117 Model space drawings, 11-121 Model space setup, 11-116 Moving objects, 6-60 and rotate, 6-60 swapping positions, 6-61 Multiple Layouts Creating, 3-39

N
New drawing Client code, 3-35 Scale, 3-34 Sheet size, 3-34 New drawings Creating, 3-32, 3-33

Index

batch operations, 13-154, 13-155, 13-157 different sheet size, 12-150 drawing sheet, 12-149 origin, 12-151 pen assignments, 12-146 sheet ink area, 12-147 sheet size, 12-144, 12-146, 18-366, 18-367 trouble shooting, 12-151 Plotting setup pcp file, 12-144 Pointing device, 3-36 Button assignments, 3-36 Points, displaying, 5-53

Script files, 13-162, 13-163 running, 13-165 spaces in, 13-164 Section arrows, 11-141 Section label, 11-140 Selecting objects, 6-56 by window, 6-56 Sheet size, 12-144, 18-366 Starting AutoSYS Windows platform, 3-32 Swapping objects, 6-61 Symbol libraries creating, 13-158 loading, 13-160

R
Rectangle drawing, 4-44 Remaking blocks, 8-87, 8-89, 8-91 nested, 8-87, 8-89 Rescale Viewport Bounding Box, 11-128 Re-scaling drawing features, 11-118 Revisions, 11-136, 11-137 cloud, 11-136 symbol, 11-137, 11-138 table, 11-137

loading Symbol libraries, 13-160 overwriting, 13-161 overwriting slide & library files, 13-161

T
Text Scale, 9-97 Linear scale, 10-108 Scale, 10-108 Tablet menus Use of, 3-36 Text, 9-96 break, 9-101 continue, 9-100

S
Save Drawing, 3-41 Scale drawing sheet, 11-116, 11-119 floating viewports, 11-122, 11-132 model space, 11-121 Scaled areas Working with, 11-125, 11-127 Script file editor, 13-164

creating, 9-97, 9-99 dimension style, 10-105 height, 11-116 height control, 9-96 layer, 9-97 layer change, 9-98 new value, 9-101 re-scale, 11-118 to lower case, 9-101 7

Index

to upper case, 9-101 Text style, 9-96 Title block adding, 11-119 automatic entries, 11-121 model/paper setup, 11-120 modifying, 11-121 revisions, 11-138 Title Block Attributes, 19-373 System Files, 19-370, 19-371, 19-373 Trimming multiple lines, 6-62

Xref control, 8-94

Z
Zooming in, 5-50, 5-51

U
User defined batch processors, 13-162, 13-163, 13-165, 13-167 drawing information, 13-162 script files, 13-163 using, 13-165, 13-166

V
Viewport Bounding box, 9-97, 10-108 Viewport Creating from a Viewport Bounding Box, 11-130 From a Viewport Bounding Box, 11-130 Viewport Bounding Box Display Data, 11-128 Working with, 11-125, 11-127

W
Wblock, 8-81 a selected block, 8-86 all internal blocks, 8-86 creating from block, 8-84 name constraints, 8-85 Wblocks creating, 8-83